Manual RX-A3070 2070

AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.

• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.
EN
• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.
CONTENTS
Introduction 5 3 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................48
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) ......................................................48
Accessories................................................................................... 5 DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only) ..........................................................49
About this book ............................................................................ 5 4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna .....50
Connecting the network cable.....................................................................................................................50
About remote control .................................................................... 6
Preparing the wireless antenna ...................................................................................................................50
Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................... 6
Operating range of the remote control......................................................................................................... 6
5 Connecting other devices............................................................51
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function ........................................................................51
6 Connecting the power cable ........................................................51

FEATURES 7 7 Selecting an on-screen menu language ........................................52
What you can do with the unit ........................................................ 7 8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings..................................53
AV CONTROLLER........................................................................................................................................... 12 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) ..................54
AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) ........................................................................................................................ 12 Multi Position ................................................................................................................................................56
MusicCast CONTROLLER.............................................................................................................................. 12 Angle/Height .................................................................................................................................................57
Part names and functions .............................................................13 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) ................................................................................57
Front panel ................................................................................................................................................... 13 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)........................................................................60
Front display (indicators) ............................................................................................................................ 15 Checking the measurement results .............................................................................................................63
Rear panel..................................................................................................................................................... 16 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments.................................................................................................63
Remote control ............................................................................................................................................ 18 Error messages .............................................................................................................................................64

Warning messages ........................................................................................................................................65
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly .................................66

PREPARATIONS 19 Selecting the connection method ...............................................................................................................66
Connecting the unit to a wireless network..................................................................................................67
General setup procedure ..............................................................19 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) .............................................................72
1 Connecting speakers ..................................................................20 11 Connecting to the MusicCast network ........................................74
Basic speaker configuration ........................................................................................................................ 21
MusicCast CONTROLLER ..............................................................................................................................74
Advanced speaker configuration ................................................................................................................ 30
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network ..................................................................................................74
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices .........................................41
Input/output jacks and cables .................................................................................................................... 41
Connecting a TV ........................................................................................................................................... 43
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) ................................................................................. 44
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) ......................................................................................... 46
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ................................................................................................ 47
En 2
PLAYBACK 75 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device ........................99
Connecting a USB storage device ................................................................................................................99
Basic playback procedure .............................................................75 Playback of USB storage device contents .................................................................................................100
Selecting an HDMI output jack .................................................................................................................... 75 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ................. 103
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch Media sharing setup ...................................................................................................................................103
(SCENE) ......................................................................................76 Playback of PC music contents ..................................................................................................................104
Registering a scene ...................................................................................................................................... 77 Listening to Internet radio .......................................................... 107

Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments................................................................... 77 Playback of Internet radio..........................................................................................................................107
Selecting the sound mode.............................................................78 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites) ...........................................................................109
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) ............................................................................. 79 Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay................................ 110
Enjoying unprocessed playback.................................................................................................................. 82 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents ..................................................................................................110
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct).......................................................................................... 83 Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ............ 112
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound Multi-zone configuration examples ...........................................................................................................112
(Compressed Music Enhancer) .................................................................................................................... 83
Preparing the multi zone system ...............................................................................................................113
Listening to FM/AM radio Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 ...........................................................................................................116
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) ........................84 Registering favorite items (shortcut) ........................................... 118
Setting the frequency steps......................................................................................................................... 84
Registering an item.....................................................................................................................................118
Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 85
Recalling a registered item.........................................................................................................................118
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) .............................................................................................. 85
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) ................. 119
Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................................................................... 87
Top menu screen ........................................................................................................................................120
Listening to DAB radio
Control screen.............................................................................................................................................120
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)............................88
Settings screen............................................................................................................................................121
Preparing the DAB tuning ............................................................................................................................ 88
Viewing the current status.......................................................... 122
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................ 89
Switching information on the front display ..............................................................................................122
Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)....................................................................................... 89
Viewing the status information on the TV .................................................................................................123
Displaying the DAB information .................................................................................................................. 90
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label ........................................................................... 91 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
Listening to FM radio (Option menu)........................................................................... 124
Option menu items.....................................................................................................................................124
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)............................93
Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 93
Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................... 93
CONFIGURATIONS 129
Radio Data System tuning ........................................................................................................................... 94
Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................................................................... 95 Configuring input sources (Input menu)....................................... 129
Playing back music via Bluetooth ..................................................97 Input menu items .......................................................................................................................................130
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit ...................................................................................... 97 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) ............................. 132
Enjoying audio using Bluetooth speakers/headphones ............................................................................ 98
Scene menu items ......................................................................................................................................132
En 3
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders APPENDIX 173
(DSP Program menu).................................................................. 135
DSP Program menu items.......................................................................................................................... 136 Frequently asked questions ........................................................ 173
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) ................................ 138 Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 174
Setup menu items ...................................................................................................................................... 139 First, check the following: ..........................................................................................................................174
Speaker (Manual Setup) ............................................................................................................................ 142 Power, system and remote control ...........................................................................................................174
Sound.......................................................................................................................................................... 147 Audio ...........................................................................................................................................................176
Video ........................................................................................................................................................... 149 Video............................................................................................................................................................178
HDMI ........................................................................................................................................................... 151 FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) .....179
Network ...................................................................................................................................................... 152 DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)....................................................................179
Bluetooth.................................................................................................................................................... 154
Bluetooth ....................................................................................................................................................180
Multi Zone................................................................................................................................................... 155
USB and network ........................................................................................................................................181
Function...................................................................................................................................................... 158
Error indications on the front display .......................................... 183
ECO ............................................................................................................................................................. 160
Language .................................................................................................................................................... 161 Glossary .................................................................................... 184
Audio information (audio decoding format) .............................................................................................184
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) ............... 161
Audio Information (Others) ........................................................................................................................186
Types of information.................................................................................................................................. 162
HDMI and video information ......................................................................................................................186
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 163
Network information ..................................................................................................................................187
ADVANCED SETUP menu items ................................................................................................................. 164
Yamaha technologies .................................................................................................................................187
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) ..................................................................... 164
Supported devices and file formats ............................................. 188
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR)................................................................ 164
Supported devices......................................................................................................................................188
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)........................................................................................... 165
File formats .................................................................................................................................................188
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) ........................................................ 165
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) .......................................................................................... 165 Video signal flow........................................................................ 189
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK)....................................................... 165 Video conversion table ...............................................................................................................................189
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) ...................................................................................... 166 Multi-zone output ...................................................................... 190
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE) .................................................................... 166
Information on HDMI.................................................................. 190
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) ........................................................................... 166
HDMI Control...............................................................................................................................................190
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)............................................................................................... 167
Audio Return Channel (ARC) ......................................................................................................................192
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE).................................................................................................... 167
HDMI signal compatibility ..........................................................................................................................192
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) ............................................................................................... 167
Trademarks............................................................................... 193
Controlling external devices with the remote control ................... 168
Registering the remote control code for a TV........................................................................................... 168
Specifications............................................................................ 194
Registering the remote control codes for playback devices.................................................................... 169
Resetting remote control codes ................................................................................................................ 170
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network .............................. 171
Updating the unit’s firmware immediately .............................................................................................. 171
Updating the unit’s firmware at power off ............................................................................................... 172
En 4
Introduction
Accessories About this book
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-A3070 (U.S.A. model), unless
otherwise specified.
# AM antenna # YPAO microphone In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models) Some features are not available in certain regions.
Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without
notice.
This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
# Microphone base This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to
Pole “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
# FM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and Icons used in this manual
Russia models)
Y
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
X
# Power cable indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
# Remote control
# DAB/FM antenna # Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
# CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
# Quick Start Guide
* (Except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)

One of the above FM antennas is supplied depending on the region of purchase.
* The microphone base and pole are used for angle/height measurement during YPAO.
* The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase.
En 5
About remote control
This section explains how to use the supplied remote control.
Batteries
Insert the batteries the right way round.
Operating range of the remote control

Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the
operating range shown below.
Within
6 m (20 ft)
30° 30°
En 6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
The unit is equipped with the various useful features. More advanced ENTERTAINMENT Various wireless connection
sound programs (p.80) methods (p.66)
Connecting various devices (p.41)
By processing front left and front right sound fields The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on individually, the ENTERTAINMENT sound programs are connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD further improved in acoustic positioning and sound network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct
players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, transition. These programs allow you to enjoy clearer vocal enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
camcorders, and other devices. and instrumental sounds, distinct narrations, and more without router.
dynamic sound effects.
Playing back TV audio in surround Home Audio Network with

sound with a single HDMI cable MusicCast (p.74)
connection (Audio Return Channel: PL
Presence L
PR
Presence R The unit supports the MusicCast feature that allows you to
Sound field Sound field
ARC) (p.41) link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a
different room and play them back simultaneously, or
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated
cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
HDMI Control
TV audio Low power consumption (p.161)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s
Video from external SL SR power consumption.
device Surround L Surround R
Sound field Sound field
Image of sound field processing
En 7
CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires
for more than 30 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.
What is a sound field? CINEMA DSP

We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound
but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this
ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs
shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give using CINEMA DSP.
us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place. By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as
This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”. movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific
content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall’s sound field actually being in that scene.)
CINEMA DSP HD3

“CINEMA DSP HD3” is Yamaha’s flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full
advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data.
It delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as
conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an
Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.
Capability for reproducing reflections

(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP HD3
Level
CINEMA DSP 3D
Time
En 8
YPAO
YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal listening environment for
maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting various speakers setting and the sound field automatically.
YPAO-R.S.C. YPAO 3D measurement

In typical home, the sound has problems such as a blurred low-frequency range or a smearing The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers, and the height of presence
of the acoustical sound image caused by undesirable sound reflection from the walls or ceiling. speakers as seen from the listening position is measured, and compensation is applied to
“YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections and produces the maximize the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP.
acoustic perfection for your listening environment.
Level
Compensation
Time
YPAO Volume
YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high and low frequency levels at any volume level so
that you hear natural sounds even at low volume.
High
YPAO Volume ON
Level
YPAO Volume OFF
Low Frequency High
En 9
Unrivaled audio and video quality
You can enjoy unrivaled high-quality audio and videos with the unit.
High-resolution music enhancer High-quality video processing

Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played back as
content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening of the a high-quality image (p.149).
musicality in the original content (p.127). • Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection
Before processing
• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source
Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement.
Loudness
signal (such as a CD)
Frequency
After processing
Playback bandwidth of a
Loudness
88.2/96 kHz signal
Frequency
En 10
Expandable to meet diverse needs
The unit provides excellent expandability which is applicable to all uses.
Support for bi-amp connections and external power amp Multi-zone function
expansion The multi-zone function (p.112) allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).
To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front speakers that support power amp
expansion, or expand your system by adding an external power amp (such as a Hi-Fi amp). (The following shows examples of use.)
For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration” (p.30).

Enjoying music using speakers in another room
The best expandability in Yamaha (RX-A3070 only) While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can listen to music through the
By connecting an external power amp, you can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an speakers of a different room.
11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.
(Example)
External power amp
Study room
(such as Zone2)
Living room (main zone)
Enjoying videos using a TV in another room (HDMI connection)

While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and music
being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room.
Kitchen
(such as Zone4)
En 11
Useful applications
The following applications provide you the flexibility to control the unit or assist you with the cable connections.
AV CONTROLLER AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) MusicCast CONTROLLER
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a “AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with MusicCast CONTROLLER is an application that allows you to
Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network cable connections between AV receiver and source devices link a MusicCast compatible device to other MusicCast
products. This application provides you the flexibility to as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you compatible devices in other rooms and play them back
control the available inputs, volume, mute, power through the various settings such as speaker connections, simultaneously. This app lets you use your smartphone or
commands and playback source. TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the other mobile device instead of the remote control to easily
speaker system. select music to play back as well as configure the unit and
Functions MusicCast compatible devices.
• Power on/off and volume adjustment Functions
• Input, scene and sound mode selection • Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices) Functions
• DSP Parameter adjustment • Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance • Selecting and playing back various content
with illustrations) – Play back music from your mobile device
• Playback control (including music selection for some
sources) • Viewing owner’s manual – Select an Internet radio station
X X – Play back music files stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google – Play back music files stored on a USB storage device
Play. Play.
• Operating and configuring the unit
– Select the input source, adjust the volume and mute the
audio output
– Select from a wide variety of sound processing features
X
For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.
En 12
Part names and functions
This section explains the functions of the parts of the unit.
Front panel
a b c d e
MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT
INPUT VOLUME
ON SCREEN OPTION TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT SCENE INFO (WPS) MEMORY PRESET
1 2 3 4
(CONNECT)
PROGRAM MULTI ZONE FM AM TUNING
ENTER
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE CONTROL

RETURN DISPLAY
PHONES VIDEO AUX
USB
5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA L AUDIO R HDMI IN
f g h
a MAIN ZONE z key f INPUT knob Opening the front panel door
Turns on/off (standby) the unit. Selects an input source.
To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
b Standby indicator g Front panel door press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the For protecting controls and jacks (p.14).
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
following conditions.
h VOLUME knob (Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.151) Adjusts the volume.
• Standby Through is enabled (p.152)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.153)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.154)
c Front display
Displays information (p.15).
d Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.6).
e PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.83).
En 13
■ Inside of the front panel door
a b cd e fg h ij kl m n
ON SCREEN OPTION TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT SCENE INFO (WPS) MEMORY PRESET
1 2 3 4
(CONNECT)
PROGRAM MULTI ZONE FM AM TUNING
ENTER

RETURN DISPLAY
PHONES VIDEO AUX
USB
o p q r (U.S.A. model)
a ON SCREEN key i MULTI ZONE keys m PRESET keys

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. ZONE 2-4: Enables/disables the audio output to each zone Select a preset FM/DAB radio station (p.90, p.94) (Australia, U.K.,
(p.116). Europe and Russia models) or a preset FM/AM radio station (p.86)
b Menu operations keys
ZONE CONTROL: Changes the zone that is controlled by the keys (other models).
Cursor keys: Select a menu or a parameter.
and knobs on the front panel (p.116). Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.118).
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen. j INFO (WPS) key n TUNING keys
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.122). Select the radio frequency (p.85).
c OPTION key
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button o USB jack
Displays the option menu (p.124).
configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.68). For connecting a USB storage device (p.99).
d DISPLAY key
k MEMORY key p YPAO MIC jack
Displays status information on the TV (p.123).
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as preset stations (p.85, p.89, For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.54).
e TONE CONTROL key p.93).
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of q PHONES jack
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
output sounds (p.125). For connecting headphones.
shortcuts (p.118).
f STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key r VIDEO AUX jacks
l FM and AM keys (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.82). For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console
Russia models)
Enters MusicCast CONTROLLER registration by holding down for 5 (p.47).
Switch between FM and AM (p.85).
seconds (p.74).
FM and DAB keys (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
g PROGRAM keys models only)
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.78).
Switch between FM and DAB (p.89, p.85).
h SCENE keys
Select the assigned input source (including the selected radio
station or content when it is assigned), sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is
in standby mode (p.76).
En 14
Front display (indicators)
a bc d e f g h i j k
ECO
ZONE ZONE ZONE PARTY VOL. MUTE A-DRC
IN OUT 1 2 2 3 4 VIRTUAL YPAO VOL.
LINK MASTER STEREO TUNED FPL L C R FPR
Hi-Res ENHANCER SLEEP SL SW1 SW2 SR
HD 3 RPL SBL SB SBR RPR
lmn o p q r rs t u
a HDMI h Information display s VIRTUAL

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.122). Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.79), or the virtual surround
IN
processing (p.81) is working.
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input. i Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume. t Speaker indicators
OUT1/OUT2
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal. j MUTE
Blinks when audio is temporarily muted. A Front speaker (L)
b ECO
S Front speaker (R)
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.161). k A-DRC
D Center speaker
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.125) is working.
c Firmware update indicator F Surround speaker (L)
Lights up when a firmware update is available via the network l Signal strength indicator G Surround speaker (R)
(p.171) Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.66).
H Surround back speaker (L)
d LINK MASTER m Bluetooth indicator J Surround back speaker (R)
Lights up when the unit is the master device of the MusicCast Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.97). K Surround back speaker
network.
n Hi-Res B Front presence speaker (L)
e ZONE indicators Lights up when the high-resolution mode (p.127) is working. N Front presence speaker (R)
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.116). M Rear presence speaker (L)
o CINEMA DSP indicator
f STEREO “CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.79) is working. < Rear presence speaker (R)
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. “CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD3 is activated. C Subwoofer (1)
TUNED p ENHANCER V Subwoofer (2)
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM radio station signal Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.83) is working. u YPAO VOL.
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) or an FM/AM radio
q SLEEP Lights up when YPAO Volume is enabled (p.125).
station signal (other models).
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
g PARTY
r Cursor indicators
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.117).
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
En 15
Rear panel
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
HDMI (HDCP2.2) NETWORK

HDMI OUT ( 3 NET )
(HDCP2.2)
2 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
(ZONE OUT) ARC (1 BD/DVD)
AC IN
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO TRIGGER

(1 BD/DVD)
Y AV 1 PB PR OUT
A
1
REMOTE RS-232C
12V 0.1A
VIDEO MAX. TOTAL IN OUT
2
B
Y AV 2 PB PR
PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV) ZONE OUT/PRE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT)
L 1
L
R R 2
ZONE 2/ ZONE 3/ (REAR)

1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER
GND 5 COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP2 EXTRA SP1
R SURROUND L R L R L CENTER R FRONT L R L
SURROUND BACK R.PRESENCE F.PRESENCE
AUDIO 4 ANTENNA
R L (4 RADIO)
FM AM
75ȍ SINGLE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
n o p q
(RX-A3070 U.S.A. model)

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper
connections.
En 16
a PHONO jacks o ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-A3070)
For connecting to a turntable (p.46). For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.113), or for
connecting to an external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence channels (p.40).
b AUDIO 1-3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.46). ZONE OUT jacks (RX-A2070)
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.113).
AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks (RX-A3070 only)
For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting audio signals (p.46). p SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.20).
c AV 1-4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.44). q PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.28) or to an external power amplifier (p.40).
d HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.41). When using ARC, TV
audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.44), or for connecting to
an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.114).
e COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1-2) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals
(p.45).
f HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.44).
g TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.51).
h REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other
devices from another room (p.115).
i NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.50).
j Wireless antenna
For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.66) and a Bluetooth connection (p.97).
k RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details.
l VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Brazil and General models only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.51).
m AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.51).
n ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to radio antennas (p.48).
En 17
Remote control
a Remote control signal transmitter j Radio keys
a Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
Transmits infrared signals.
input source (p.85).
SOURCE RECEIVER b RECEIVER z key
b BAND: Switches between FM and DAB radio (Australia, U.K.,
AV
Turns on/off (standby) the unit. Europe and Russia models), or FM and AM radio (other models).
1 2 3 4
RECEIVER key PRESET: Select a preset station.
5 6 7 V-AUX
Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.169). This key lights TUNING: Select the radio frequency.
AUDIO up in orange after pressed.
c 1 2 3 4
SOURCE key
External device operation keys
Let you play back and perform other operations for external devices
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.169). This
when an input source other than “TUNER” is selected (p.169).
key lights up in green after pressed.
TUNER
SOURCE z key k Sound mode keys
d
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
p Turns on/off an external device. Select a sound mode (p.78).
SCENE
q c Input selection keys
l INFO key
e Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.122).
1 2 3 4 Select an input source for playback.
AV 1-7: AV 1-7 jacks
m SLEEP key
Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min, 90 min,
V-AUX: VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) 60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to the standby mode.
f PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
r AUDIO 1-4 (RX-A3070): AUDIO 1-4 jacks
n Numeric keys
AUDIO 1-3 (RX-A2070): AUDIO 1-3 jacks Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
s PHONO: PHONO jacks
g TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU MEMORY key
BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as presets (p.85, p.89, p.93).
h t
ON
OPTION
SCREEN
(the unit as a Bluetooth receiver) Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
USB: USB jack (on the front panel) shortcuts (p.118).
i ENTER
NET: NETWORK sources o TV operation keys
(press repeatedly to select a desired network source) Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
RETURN DISPLAY
u TUNER: FM/AM/DAB radio operations (p.168).
BAND
d ZONE switch p HDMI OUT key
MODE
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.75).
j TUNING PRESET Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control (p.116).
q PARTY key
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT e SCENE keys
k MOVIE MUSIC
Select the registered input source, sound program, and various
Turns on/off the party mode (p.117).
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
l INFO SLEEP settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in r VOLUME keys
standby mode (p.76). Adjust the volume.
m 1 2 3 4
f PROGRAM keys s MUTE key

n 5 6 7 8
Select a sound program, a surround decoder, an input source, a Mutes the audio output.
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
network source, a registered item (shortcut), a browse screen page, t OPTION key
TV
INPUT
the volume of dialogue sounds or shuffle/repeat settings (p.158). Displays the option menu (p.124).
o TV VOL TV CH
g External device operation keys
MUTE CODE SET
v u DISPLAY key
Select menus for external devices (p.169). Displays status information on the TV (p.123).
h ON SCREEN key v CODE SET key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. Registers remote control codes of external devices on the remote
control (p.168).
(RX-A3070) i Menu operation keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or the parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
X
To operate external devices with the remote control, register a remote
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen. control code for each device before using (p.168).
En 18
PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.20)
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.41)
3 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.48)
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.50)
5 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)
6 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.52)
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.53)
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.54)
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.66)
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.74)

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
En 19
1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.30).
Caution
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.27).
Ideal speaker layout Functions of each speaker
Speaker type Function

E R
0.5 to 1 m 0.5 to 1 m Front (L/R)
(1.6 to 3.3 ft) (1.6 to 3.3 ft) Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
12
1 2 Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).
1.8 m 1.8 m Surround (L/R) Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce
(5.9 ft) (5.9 ft) 45 surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.
Surround back (L/R)

9 3 9 Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
67
Front presence (L/R) Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
ER and DTS:X contents.
4 5 Rear presence (L/R) Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
TY and DTS:X contents.
10°~30° 10°~30°
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of
other channels.
Subwoofer 9
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and
place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.
T Y
X
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker
6 7 layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such
as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
1.8 m 0.3 m (1 ft) or more 1.8 m and “SBR” in the diagram).
(5.9 ft) (5.9 ft)
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence
speakers.
En 20
Basic speaker configuration
If you do not apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external amplifier) or multi-zone configurations, follow the procedure below to place the speakers in your room and connect
them to the unit.
■ Placing speakers in your room 7.2.2/5.2.4 system [S]

Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This (using both surround back and rear presence speakers)
section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a
X highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark. However,
you can also play back Dolby Atmos contents with the 7.1 system (using surround back speakers). E R
• To have a full effect of DTS:X contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark.
• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead 1 2
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker
layout” (p.26). 9 3 9
4 5
T Y
6 7
X
• The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP (p.79).
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled
speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the
“Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.53).
• (RX-A3070 only)
By using an external power amplifier (p.31), you can make an 11-channel system [★7.2.4] and enjoy Dolby
Atmos and DTS:X contents with the front presence and rear presence speakers.
En 21
5.2.4 system [S] (using rear presence speakers) 7.2.2 system [S] (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a highly-natural This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional
3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back
surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for speakers.
enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
E R
E R
1 2
1 2
9 3 9
9 3 9
4 5
4 5
6 7
T Y
X
X • When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the “Setup” YPAO (p.53).
menu before performing YPAO (p.53). • This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
En 22
5.1.2 system [S] (using front presence speakers) 7.1 system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy
speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
X
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
YPAO (p.53).
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
En 23
5.1 system 5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using surround speakers)
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.
1 2
4 5
9 3
X
You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (4.1 system).
X
When placing surround speakers in the front side, set “Layout (Surround)” in the “Setup” menu to “Front” before
performing YPAO (p.53).
En 24
5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using front presence speakers) 2.1 system
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.
E R
1 2
9 3
X
Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1 system.
X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.53).
En 25
Presence speaker layout Dolby Enabled SP
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height/Rear Height,
Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers
environment. that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.
X
• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP HD3 with any layout pattern.
• You can configure the placement patterns for front presence and rear presence speakers separately.
Front Height/Rear Height

Install the presence speakers on the front/rear side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound
spaces, and sound extensity effectively.
X
Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit
may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled
speakers.
Notes on installation of ceiling speakers

When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, use the following illustration as a reference.
When using two presence speakers
Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and
rear sound spaces effectively.
Installation position
Just above the listening position, or the ceiling between extensions of front speakers and
Y listening position
For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.26).
En 26
When using four presence speakers ■ Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm
speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
Installation position
Front presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position
Rear presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the listening position and surround (or surround back)
3 Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
speakers SPEAKER¡IMP.
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN
Caution
Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.
4 Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
5 Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power
cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
En 27
■ Connecting speakers Speakers to be connected
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. Speaker system
Speaker type (the number of channels)
Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables
7.2.2/5.2.4 7.1/5.1.2 5.1 2.1
Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire
Front (L/R) 1 2 ( ( ( (
strands into the unit’s interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit.
Center 3 ( ( (
Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and also damage the unit
Surround (L/R) 4 5 ( ( )*5
or the speakers.
Surround back (L/R) 6 7 )*1 )*3
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before
Front presence (L/R) E R ( )*4 )*6
connecting the speakers.
Rear presence (L/R) T Y )*2
• Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together.
Subwoofer 9 ( ( ( (
If you have eleven speakers, you can connect the both surround back speakers and rear
presence speakers. In this case, the unit automatically changes the speakers to be used,
depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP.
If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear presence
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one another. speakers (*2).
If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*3) or front presence
speakers (*4).
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*5) or front presence speakers
(*6).
X
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit’s metal parts • You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,
configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.145) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an
(rear panel and screws).
AC wall outlet.
• When apply this speaker configuration, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.142) to “Basic” (default).
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.40).
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and
then check the speaker cables short circuit. + +
– –
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
En 28
Connection diagram Connecting speaker cables
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT)
1 the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent
The unit 2 confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
(rear)
ZONE 2/ ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER CENTER
1
SPEAKERS
R SURROUND L R
SURROUND BACK
L R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L CENTER R FRONT L R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
SINGLE
2 Loosen the speaker terminal.

3 Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.
4 Tighten the terminal.
E R + FR
3
ON
+ (red) T
2
1 2
1
4
9 3 9 – (black)
Using a banana plug

4 5
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Brazil and General models only)
1 Tighten the speaker terminal.
T Y
2 Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
6 7
1 + FR
ON
T
Banana plug
2
Y
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Audio pin cable

PRE
OUT
(SING
LE)
(FR
ONT)
1
2
SURR
UND
SUR.
BACK
SUBW
OOFE
R
SURR CENT
ER
OUN
D BA
CK
L
En 29
Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.21), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.
Combining with an external

Using the four internal Using the excess internal
power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier,
amplifiers for front speakers to amplifiers for stereo speakers
multichannel amplifier, etc.) to
have more high-quality sounds in another room
build an extended system
Bi-amp connection Power-amp channel expansion Multi-zone configuration

(Example) (Example) (Example)
External power
amplifier
Bi-amp
connection
Zone2
Main zone
En 30
■ Available speaker configurations (RX-A2070)
Main zone
(RX-A3070)
Output External power Power Amp Assign
External Multi-zone Page
channel Bi-amp amplifier (p.142)
Main zone speakers
(max) (required)
Output External power Power Amp Assign
External Multi-zone Page
channel Bi-amp amplifier (p.142) 7 Surround back +1 room 7.2 +1Zone 32
speakers
(max) (required) Surround back
9 +1 room 7.2.2 +1Zone 32
7 Surround back +1 room 7.2 +1Zone 32 Front presence
Surround back 7 Surround back +2 rooms 7.2 +2Zone 33
9 +1 room 7.2.2 +1Zone 32
Front presence Surround back 7.2.2 [ext.Front]
9 Front +1 room 35
7 Surround back +2 rooms 7.2 +2Zone 33 Front presence +1Zone
Surround back 7.2 [ext.Front]

11 Rear presence 7.2.4 [ext.RP] 33 7 Surround back Front +2 rooms 35
Front presence +2Zone
Surround back 7 ) Surround back 7.2 Bi-Amp 36

11 Front presence Front 7.2.4 [ext.Front] 34 7 ) Front presence 5.2.2 Bi-Amp 36
Rear presence 7 ) Surround back +1 room 7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone 37
Front presence
11 Surround back
Rear presence
7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP] 34
Y
Surround back • When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the
7.2.2 [ext.Front]
9 Front +1 room 35 “Setup” menu (p.53).
Front presence +1Zone
• When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA
7.2 [ext.Front]
7 Surround back Front +2 rooms 35 SP 1-2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.142) in the “Setup” menu. The following explanation is based on the
+2Zone
assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments.
7 ) Surround back 7.2 Bi-Amp 36
7 ) Front presence 5.2.2 Bi-Amp 36
7 ) Surround back +1 room 7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone 37
Front presence 7.2.4 Bi-Amp
11 ) Surround back 37
Rear presence [ext.FP+RP]
5.2.4 Bi-Amp
9 ) Front presence Rear presence 38
[ext.RP]
En 31
7.2 +1Zone 7.2.2 +1Zone
E R
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
9 3 9 9 3 9
4 5 4 5
6 7 6 7
Zone2 Zone2
Main zone Main zone
Speaker Connect to Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT 12 FRONT
3 CENTER 3 CENTER
45 SURROUND 45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK 67 SURROUND BACK
ER (not used) ER EXTRA SP 1
TY (not used) TY (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2 9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1 Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 2
X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.116), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
En 32
7.2 +2Zone 7.2.4 [ext.RP] (RX-A3070 only)
1 2 E R
1 2
1 2
9 3 9
9 3 9
4 5 Zone2
4 5
6 7
1 2
T Y
via via
external amp external amp
6 7
Main zone
Zone3
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT
Speaker Connect to
3 CENTER
12 FRONT
45 SURROUND
3 CENTER
67 SURROUND BACK
45 SURROUND
ER (not used)
67 SURROUND BACK
TY (not used)
ER EXTRA SP 1
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
Y
X When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
When Zone3 output is enabled (p.116), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. amplifier for Zone3 (p.113).
En 33
7.2.4 [ext.Front] (RX-A3070 only) 7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP] (RX-A3070 only)
via external amp
E R E R
via external amp via external amp
1 2 1 2
9 3 9 9 3 9
4 5 4 5
T Y T Y
via via
6 7 external amp 6 7 external amp
12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier 12 FRONT
3 CENTER 3 CENTER
ER EXTRA SP 1 ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
TY EXTRA SP 2 TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
Y Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external
amplifier for Zone3 (p.113). amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.113).
En 34
7.2.2 [ext.Front] +1Zone 7.2 [ext.Front] +2Zone
E R
1 2
1 2 1 2 1 2
9 3 9 9 3 9
4 5 4 5 Zone2
6 7 6 7
Zone2 1 2
Main zone Main zone
Zone3
12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier 12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
3 CENTER 3 CENTER
ER EXTRA SP 1 ER (not used)
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 2 Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1
En 35
7.2 Bi-Amp 5.2.2 Bi-Amp
Bi-amp Bi-amp
E R
1 2 1 2
9 3 9 9 3 9
4 5 4 5
6 7
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection) 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3 CENTER 3 CENTER
67 SURROUND BACK 67 (not used)
ER (not used) ER EXTRA SP 2
En 36
7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone 7.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.FP+RP] (RX-A3070 only)
Bi-amp
Bi-amp
E R
1 2 1 2 1 2
9 3 9 9 3 9
4 5 4 5
6 7
Zone2
T Y
via via
external amp 6 7 external amp
Main zone
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

Speaker Connect to
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
3 CENTER
67 SURROUND BACK
45 SURROUND
ER (not used)
67 SURROUND BACK
TY (not used)
ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.116), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external
amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.113).
En 37
5.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.RP] (RX-A3070 only)
Bi-amp
E R
1 2
9 3 9
4 5
T Y
via via
external amp external amp
Speaker Connect to
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 (not used)
ER EXTRA SP 2
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
amplifier for Zone3 (p.113).
En 38
■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp ■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers
connections When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1-2 terminals.
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT To utilize the EXTRA SP 1-2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign”
terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals. setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.53).
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu The unit (rear)
after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.53). R SURROUND L R
SURROUND BACK
L R
SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
The unit (rear) SINGLE
SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP2 EXTRA SP1
R L R L CENTER R FRONT L R L
SINGLE
1 2
1 2
1 2 4 5
6 7
3 Zone2 or Zone3
9 9
1 2
4 5 Main zone
Zone2 or Zone3
X X
• You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1-2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.142)
The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals output the same signals.
in the “Setup” menu.
Caution • You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.113).
Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
En 39
■ Connecting an external power amplifier (Example)
When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
( 3 NET )
V2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
Main input jack

Caution NT VIDEO
PB PR
TRIGGER
OUT
1
REMOTE RS-232C
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making 12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL IN OUT
PR
MAIN IN
2
connections. UT
PB PR
PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT)
1
L L
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them. 2
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. 3/
NCE FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER CENTER
SPEAKERS
R R
EXTRA SP2
ROUND L R L R L CENTER R FRONT L
Amplifier with
SURROUND BACK R.PRESENCE
– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume
FRONT SUR
of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the SINGLE
volume control
unit) to the pre-main amplifier. bypass
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
(such as A-S3000)
The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT ( 3 NET )
(HDCP2.2)
2 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
AC IN
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO TRIGGER

)
Y AV 1 PB PR OUT
A
1
REMOTE RS-232C
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL IN OUT
2
B
Y AV 2 PB PR
1

6 OPTICAL F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER
5 COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP2 EXTRA SP1
R SURROUND L R L R L CENTER R FRONT L R L
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
FM AM
SINGLE
a b c de f The unit (rear)
a F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3070 only)

Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp About external power amplifiers
Assign” setting (p.142).
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
b R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3070 only)
Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp • With unbalanced inputs
Assign” setting (p.142). • With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
c FRONT jacks • Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 Ω)
Output front channel sounds.
d SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
e SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect the
external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).
f CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
En 40
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices
Connect a TV and playback devices (video and audio devices) to the unit.
For information on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.99).
Input/output jacks and cables

The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Prepare the cables that match the jacks on your devices.
■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks

To input/output video and audio signals, use the following To input only video signals, use the following jacks. To input/output only audio signals, use the following jacks.
jacks.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks OPTICAL jacks
HDMI jacks Transmit video signals separated into three components: Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable.
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single luminance (Y), chrominance blue (Pb), and chrominance red Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable.
jack. Use an HDMI cable. (Pr). Use a component video cable with three plugs.
Digital optical cable
Component video cable
AV 1 HDMI cable
O
T VIDE PR
ONEN
COMVP 1 PB
A
Y A
COAXIAL jacks
Y
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable.
cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. VIDEO jacks
X Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
Digital coaxial cable
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel
AV 1
(ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. Video pin cable
VIDEO
AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable
(RCA cable).
Stereo pin cable

AUDIO3
En 41
XLR jacks
Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced cable.
Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the XLR
balanced cable until you hear a click.
XLR balanced cable(male)

IO 4
AUD
X
When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH button
on the unit and then pull the connector out.
About the XLR jacks

The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown
below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the
instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR
jacks are compatible with the pin assignments.
2. HOT 1. GND
3. COLD
En 42
Connecting a TV X
• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power
and volume with the TV’s remote control.
■ HDMI connection To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.190).
cable).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
Y • ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.44). single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
HDMI OUT jack • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
HDMI OUT
The unit 2
(HDCP2.2)
1
(rear) (ZONE OUT) ARC
HDMI
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2 1 AV 1 AV 2
HDMI input
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO
(1 BD/DVD) AV 1
Y PB PR
A
VIDEO HDMI
B
Y AV 2 PB PR
PHONO AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
L ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
HDMI
L
R R
AUDIO 1
(2 TV) ZONE 2/ ZONE 3/
AUDIO
1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE FRONT
GND 5 COAXIAL
R SURROUND L
L
L L
AUDIO 4 ANTENNA
R L (4 RADIO)
FM AM
75ȍ
R
R R
1 OPTICAL TV
OPTICAL
O O
AUDIO 1 Audio output

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks (digital optical or analog stereo)
En 43
■ Connecting another TV or a projector Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the
an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the
unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of
remote control (p.75).
the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has
an HDMI output jack.
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI HDMI OUT Y
The unit 2
(HDCP2.2)
1
(rear) (ZONE OUT) ARC
The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting
TV (p.158) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A, B), COAXIAL (3, 4, 5)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks to another input source.
2 1 AV 1 AV 2
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 1
A
PB PR
X
VIDEO
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
B
Y AV 2 PB PR
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
L ZONE OUT/PRE OUT determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.128) in the “Option” menu.
R R
HDMI
HDMI input
ZONE 2/ ZONE 3/
GND 5 COAXIAL
R SURROUND L
HDMI
■ HDMI connection
AUDIO 4 ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

R L
FM AM
75ȍ
The unit (rear) HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks

Projector
HDMI (HDCP2.2) NE
I OUT
CP2.2)
1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
ARC (1 BD/DVD)
TV (already connected) AV 3 AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO TRIGGER

Y AV 1 PB PR OUT
A
Y
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
HDMI output
MAX. TOTAL IN OUT
2
B
PB PR
Y AV 2
HDMI
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. ZONE OUT/PRE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT)
1
2
HDMI
• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/ ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER CENTER HDMI
SPEAKERS
monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.114). R SURROUND L R
SURROUND BACK
L R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L CENTER
A
AM
SINGLE
Video device
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-7 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.
En 44
■ Component video connection ■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial,
coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the
output jacks available on your video device. audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio Video Audio
Digital coaxial AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital coaxial AV 1-2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Component video
Analog stereo AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO) Composite video Digital optical AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1-4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear) Y PB PR
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
AV 1-4 (VIDEO)
2 AV 1
jacks
1
(ZONE OUT) ARC (1 BD/DVD
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 A
ARC
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COM
(ZONE OUT) (1 BD/DVD) (1 BD/DVD) AV
Y
A
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 1
A
PB PR VIDEO
Video output
Video output
B V (composite video)
PR
PB
Y
Y
VIDEO AV
(2 TV) ZONE OU
L L
PHONO AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
Y
B
AV 2
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

PB PR
PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT)
(component video)
L L 1 R R
VIDEO
ZONE 2/
R R 2 V
Y PB PR GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL F.PRESENCE
PR R
GND 5 COAXIAL
S
R SURROUND L R L R
E PB
SURROUND BACK R
AUDIO 4 ANTENNA
R L (4 RADIO)
FM AM
Y 75ȍ
AUDIO 4 ANTENNA
R L (4 RADIO)
FM AM
75ȍ SINGLE
C C
C C
ZONE 2/Z COAXIAL
COAXIAL
Video device
O O
L
Video device
OPTICAL
L
L L
L L
R
R R R
R R
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL) or Audio output

AV 1-2 (AUDIO) jacks (digital coaxial or analog stereo) Any of AV 1-2 (COAXIAL), Audio output
AV 3 (OPTICAL), (any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
AV 1-4 (AUDIO) jacks analog stereo)
X
To connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and a digital optical cable, use “Input
Assignment” (p.158) in the “Setup” menu to assign the COMPONENT VIDEO and OPTICAL jacks to the same input
source.
En 45
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) PHONO jacks
Audio output
(PHONO)
PHONO PHONO
Connect audio devices such as CD players and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio L
L
output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. L L
Y R
R
The unit (rear)
R
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
GND Ground lead GND
setting (p.158) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (3, 4, 5) and OPTICAL (1, 2, HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2 1 AV 1 AV 2
6) jacks to another input source. (ZONE OUT) ARC (1 BD/DVD)
(1 BD/DVD) AV 1
Y PB PR
A
• (RX-A3070 only) VIDEO

Turntable
Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that its PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
Y
B
AV 2 PB PR C C
(2 TV) ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L L
XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.42). COAXIAL
R R
X
O O
ZONE 2/ ZONE 3/
GND 5 COAXIAL
R SURROUND L OPTICAL
L
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be R
AUDIO 4
L
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75ȍ
FM AM
L L
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.128) in the “Option” menu. Audio device
R
R R
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on the unit
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL)
Digital coaxial
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
XLR
AV 3 (OPTICAL)
Digital optical
AUDIO 1-2 (OPTICAL)
AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA])
XLR
XLR
Analog stereo (RCA)
AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA]) XLR
Analog stereo (XLR) AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) (RX-A3070 only)
Turntable (PHONO) PHONO

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL, Audio output
OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA], AUDIO [XLR]) (any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
jacks analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-4 or PHONO on the remote control,
the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
* AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) jack: RX-A3070 only
When connecting a turntable

• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
En 46
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ■ Analog stereo connection
Connect a playback device (such as CD players) to the unit with a stereo pin cable.
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
ENTER
Use the USB jack to connect a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting a USB storage RETURN DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
device” (p.99).
PHONES
USB
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the 5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA L AUDIO R HDMI IN
L R
unit.
The unit (front)

■ HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
RETURN DISPLAY
PHONES VIDEO AUX
USB
HDMI
The unit (front) Audio device
If you select “VIDEO AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the audio played back on the
Game console device will be output from the unit.
X
If you connect devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs audio
input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
Camcorder
If you select “VIDEO AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
Y
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.
En 47
3 Connecting the radio antennas
Connect the supplied radio antenna to the unit. Assembling the AM antenna
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe and

Russia models)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
FM antenna
AM antenna
Connecting the AM antenna

HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT) ARC
1 AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
Hold down Insert Release
(1 BD/DVD)
Y AV 1 PB PR OUT
A
1
R
12V 0.1A
VIDEO MAX. TOTAL IN
2
B
Y AV 2 PB PR
L L 1
X
R R 2

GND 5 COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP2
R SURROUND L R L R L
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
AUDIO 4 ANTENNA
R L (4 RADIO)
75ȍ
FM AM
SINGLE
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
The unit (rear)
En 48
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
DAB/FM antenna
The unit (rear)

(1 BD/DVD)
Y AV 1 PB PR OUT
A
1
RE
12V 0.1A
VIDEO MAX. TOTAL IN
2
B
Y AV 2 PB PR
L L 1
R R 2

GND 5 COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP2
R SURROUND L R L R L
AUDIO 4 ANTENNA
DAB/FM
R L (4 RADIO)
(4 RADIO)
FM AM
75ȍ SINGLE
75ȍ
Y
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.
En 49
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
Y
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security
software or firewall settings appropriately.
Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Connecting the network cable
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or Preparing the wireless antenna
higher straight cable).
If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up straight.
Internet Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to
a network device wirelessly” (p.66).
WAN
LAN
Modem
PC
Network cable
The unit (rear)
Router
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
AV 6 AV 7
AC IN
Mobile device TRIGGER

OUT
1
REMOTE RS-232C
Y
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL IN OUT
Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
X
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network
Connection” (p.152) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as
the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure
the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters
manually (p.152).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.162) in the “Information” menu.
En 50
5 Connecting other devices 6 Connecting the power cable
Connect a device compatible with the trigger function. Before connecting the power cable (Brazil and General models only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are
AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger
function Y
Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet.
Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard.
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such
as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a The unit (rear)
system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by AV 7
NETWORK
( 3 NET )
connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug GGER
AC IN
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
OUT
REMOTE RS-232C
cable. .1A
TAL IN OUT VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V-
240V
Trigger In Power amplifier 110V-

The unit (rear) TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks (+12V)
120V
(such as MX-A5000)
ERS
TRIGGER SP2
NCE
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
OUT
DMI (HDCP2.2) NETWORK
( 3 NET )
AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
1
TRIGGER 12V 0.1A

OUT
MAX. TOTAL
1
REMOTE RS-232C
F.PRESENCE ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL IN OUT
2
2
(SINGLE) (FRONT)
1
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER CENTER
SPEAKERS
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then
EXTRA SP2
L R L CENTER R FRONT L
to an AC wall outlet.
SINGLE
The unit (rear)

NETWORK
( 3 NET )
System
connector AC IN
Yamaha
jack OTE RS-232C
subwoofer OUT
To an AC wall outlet
X
You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.159) in the “Setup”
menu. CENTER R FRONT L R
EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE
L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
En 51
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language
SOURCE RECEIVER Select the desired on-screen menu language from English, Japanese,
1 2
AV
3 4
RECEIVER z
French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the
cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language.
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4
1 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET
TUNER
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
from the unit.
X
SCENE
1 2 3 4
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 3 Press ON SCREEN.

6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
ON
SCREEN OPTION
ENTER Cursor keys

4 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
7 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
ENTER
RETURN DISPLAY RETURN X
BAND The information on the front display is provided in English only.
MODE
TUNING PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
En 52
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
SOURCE RECEIVER If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
1 2
AV
3 4
RECEIVER z
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings 6 Configure the corresponding speaker settings.
manually before performing YPAO. • When using any of advanced speaker configurations, select
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
• Advanced speaker configuration (p.30) “Power Amp Assign” (p.142), then select your speaker system.
1 2 3 4
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET • Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual • When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system
TUNER CINEMA FRONT) (p.24) (Virtual CINEMA FRONT), select “Configuration” ! “Layout” !
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback (p.26) “Surround” (p.143), then select “Front”.
SCENE
• When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X
1 2 3 4
1 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. playback, select “Configuration” ! “Layout” ! “Front
Presence” (p.144), then select your front presence speaker
2
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video layout.

TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). If you are using the rear presence speakers, also select its layout
ON
OPTION in “Rear Presence”.
X
SCREEN
Cursor keys
7
ENTER
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
ENTER To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
RETURN DISPLAY RETURN
BAND
MODE
TUNING PRESET 3 Press ON SCREEN.

MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
9
6
0
7
MEMORY
10 ENT
8
5 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker” and
INPUT
TV then “Manual Setup”.
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
En 53
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
SOURCE RECEIVER The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
1 2
AV
3 4
RECEIVER z
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your 4 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and
listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
5 6 7 V-AUX
settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your

X
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
room.
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4 PARTY HDMI OUT

X ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the
tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
ZONE The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
SCENE technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed YPAO MIC
1 2 3 4
for acoustic perfection. jack The unit (front)
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME Y YPAO MIC

Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU

– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children. E R
ON
OPTION
– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
SCREEN
– Keep the room as quiet as possible. 1 2

ENTER
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become
an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
RETURN DISPLAY RETURN – Do not connect headphones. 9 3
BAND
MODE
TUNING PRESET

YPAO
4 5
MOVIE MUSIC
2 microphone
INFO SLEEP
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
from the unit.
MEMORY
X
9 0 10 ENT
TV Ear height
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
MUTE CODE SET

The following screen appears on the TV.
3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
CROSSOVER/
VOLUME HIGH CUT
9
MIN MAX MIN MAX
X
To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the
measurement.
En 54
5 If desired, select the measuring options.
SOURCE RECEIVER
RECEIVER 1 Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.56) or

1 2
AV
3 4
“Angle/Height” (p.57) and press ENTER.
2
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
1 2 3 4

Y
TUNER If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate external
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor keys.
SCENE
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
1 2 3 4
measurement.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:

“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.60)
ON
SCREEN OPTION
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:

ENTER Cursor keys
ENTER “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.57)
RETURN DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
En 55
Multi Position Single measure
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Selects multi measure or single measure.
a d e
bac
Settings
Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others Multi measure Multi measure
(1 listening position + (2 listening positions +
to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different
Yes front/back/left/right) front/back)
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area
defined by those positions (multi measure).
Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the
No (default) measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit
that position (single measure).
X b
c a e
c
a b
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a d d
wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated
most frequently.
En 56
Angle/Height Measuring at one listening position
Enables/disables the angle/height measurement.
(single measure)
SOURCE RECEIVER
1 2
AV
3 4
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
5 6 7 V-AUX
measurement. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the measurement.
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
Y
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see
TUNER “Error messages” (p.64) or “Warning messages” (p.65).
ZONE • Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.
SCENE
1
1 2 3 4
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
Settings
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
“Measure” and press ENTER.
Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will
measure angle of each speaker and height of the presence The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
Yes speakers at the listening position, and correct the speaker start the measurement immediately.
ON
SCREEN OPTION parameters so that CINEMA DSP can create more effective
ENTER Cursor keys

sound fields. X
No (default) Disables the angle/height measurement. To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
ENTER
RETURN DISPLAY RETURN The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement
MODE
BAND
finishes.
TUNING PRESET

(when angle/height measurement is disabled)
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Proceed to Step 3.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
En 57
(when angle/height measurement is enabled)
3 Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the
Proceed to Step 2. YPAO microphone to the position “1”.
SOURCE RECEIVER
AV
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
TUNER

ZONE
Microphone
SCENE base
1 2 3 4
2 Perform the angle/height measurement.

PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
1 Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.

TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.
ON
SCREEN OPTION
2 Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.

ENTER Cursor keys
ENTER Pole
RETURN DISPLAY
MODE
BAND
Y
TUNING PRESET • We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP • Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
1 2 3 4
finishes.
5 6 7 8 Microphone base
9 0
MEMORY
10 ENT
4 Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
5 In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the

positions “2” and “3”.
En 58
6 Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
4 To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys
fourth angle measurement.
SOURCE RECEIVER
(e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
AV
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
TUNER

ZONE
SCENE
The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
1 2 3 4
measurement finishes.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
X
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
5
ON
SCREEN OPTION
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to
ENTER Cursor keys enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
ENTER
RETURN DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC

3 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press
INFO SLEEP ENTER.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
MEMORY
8 X
9 0 10 ENT To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking
TV
INPUT the measurement results” (p.63).
MUTE
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET X
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.125) in the
“Option” menu.
6 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
En 59
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
3 When the measurements at the positions you want to
SOURCE RECEIVER
measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select
AV
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
“CANCEL” and press ENTER.
1 2 3 4
measurement. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
positions. following screen appears automatically.
1 2 3 4
(when angle/height measurement is disabled)

PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH USB NET
Y Proceed to Step 5.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see
ZONE “Error messages” (p.64) or “Warning messages” (p.65).
SCENE
• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

1 To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
ON
SCREEN OPTION
start the measurement immediately.
Cursor keys
X
ENTER
ENTER (when angle/height measurement is enabled)

RETURN To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
RETURN DISPLAY
Proceed to Step 4.
MODE
BAND
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at
TUNING PRESET
the first position finishes.
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
2 Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position

and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to
8) have been taken.
En 60
4 Perform the angle/height measurement. 4 Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
SOURCE RECEIVER
1 Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER. measurement finishes.
AV
1 2 3 4 Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.
5 6 7 V-AUX
1 2
AUDIO
3 4
2 Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.

Pole
TUNER

ZONE
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME 5 In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
Microphone base positions “2” and “3”.
ON
SCREEN OPTION 3 Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be 6 Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the fourth angle measurement.
ENTER Cursor keys
ENTER position “1”.
RETURN DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 0
MEMORY
10 ENT Microphone The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
INPUT
TV
base measurement finishes.
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
Y
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.
En 61
5 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press 8 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
SOURCE RECEIVER
ENTER. This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
1 2
AV
3 4 X Caution
5 6 7 V-AUX
To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking
AUDIO the measurement results” (p.63). The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
1 2 3 4 where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH USB NET
6 To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to

MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
ON
SCREEN OPTION
ENTER Cursor keys

ENTER
RETURN DISPLAY
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
X
BAND
MODE
TUNING PRESET
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
MOVIE MUSIC
7
INFO SLEEP
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
X
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.125) in the
“Option” menu.
En 62
Checking the measurement results Angle
Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening position
(Horizontal)
SOURCE RECEIVER
You can check the YPAO measurement results. Height of the presence speakers above the level of the
Height
listening position
AV
1 2 3 4
1 After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4
“Result” and press ENTER. 3 To finish checking the results and return to the previous
screen, press RETURN.
X
TUNER You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
ZONE
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
SCENE
The following screen appears.
1 2 3 4
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN a b
ON
SCREEN OPTION 1 In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”,
and then “Result” (p.138).
ENTER Cursor keys
ENTER
c
2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press
MODE
BAND
a Measurement result items ENTER.
TUNING PRESET

b Measurement result details
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT c The number of measured positions (when multi measure is
1 2 3 4
performed)
5 6 7 8
9 0
TV
MEMORY
10 ENT 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item.
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET
Polarity of each speaker
Wiring Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the

subwoofer) 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
Size
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level Output level adjustment for each speaker
En 63
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.
E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.
E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen
E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”,
E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.
YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions
E-6: Check Sur.
are connected. to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.
measurement again.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-11: No R.PRNS SP One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.
En 64
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message Cause Remedy
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.63) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
W-1: Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-).
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.63) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the
W-2: Over Distance
position. listening position.
Select “Level” in “Result” (p.63) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
W-3: Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using
the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.
En 65
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a ■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
wireless connection.
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.12) to control the
Selecting the connection method unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the The unit
Mobile device
unit. (such as iPhone)
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless
Internet
Direct)” (p.72).
Wireless router
Y
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.50) or the wireless
network connection (p.67).
Modem • When Wireless Direct is enabled, the both the unit and mobile device cannot be connected to the Internet. In
this case, you cannot use the Internet services such as Internet radio. To use the Internet services, terminate
the Wireless Direct connection on the mobile device.
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.67).
Y
You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with Wireless Direct (p.72).
En 66
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network.
1
SOURCE
2
AV
RECEIVER
3 4
RECEIVER z
Select a connection method according to your environment. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
• Using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.74)

5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4 • Sharing the iOS device setting (p.67)

6 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET • Using the WPS push button configuration (p.68)
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
• Using other connection methods (p.69) 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
SCENE
(Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
1 2 3 4
■ Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily set up a wireless connection by applying the connection
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN
ON
SCREEN OPTION
wireless router.
ENTER Cursor keys Y

ENTER If you set up a wireless connection with this method, the following settings will be
RETURN DISPLAY
initialized.
MODE
BAND
– Network settings
X
TUNING PRESET The checkmark indicates the current setting.
– Bluetooth settings
– USB and network items registered as shortcuts
8
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
– Internet radio stations register to “Favorites”

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share
1 2 3 4
– Account information for the network services Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
X
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
INPUT
TV
• You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example
MUTE
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET
for iOS 8.)
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
2 Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video

from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
3 Press ON SCREEN.
En 67
■ Using the WPS push button configuration
9 After checking the on-screen message, use the cursor
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS
keys (e/r) and ENTER to select “NEXT”.
SOURCE RECEIVER
button.
RECEIVER z
AV
1 2 3 4
Y
5 6 7 V-AUX
This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access
AUDIO
1 2 3 4 point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
TUNER

ZONE
1
SCENE
2 3 4
2 Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
10 On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in
the Wi-Fi screen. 3 Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
ON
SCREEN OPTION
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
ENTER Cursor keys the front display.
ENTER
RETURN DISPLAY
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
MODE
BAND connection method.
TUNING PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
About WPS
The name of the unit
INFO SLEEP WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
1 2 3 4
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
5 6 7
MEMORY
8 11 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”.
9 0 10 ENT
TV
Tap here to start setup
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
The network currently selected
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to

the selected network (access point).
En 68
■ Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button
8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
SOURCE RECEIVER
configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the
RECEIVER z
1 2
AV
3 4
wireless network settings.
1
5 6 7 V-AUX
1 2
AUDIO
3 4
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
SCENE
1 2 3 4
Y The following connection methods are available.
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
unit via HDMI.
You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button
WPS Button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions
ON
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 3 Press ON SCREEN. displayed on the TV screen.
SCREEN OPTION
Share Wi-Fi
ENTER Cursor keys 4 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Settings (iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.67).
ENTER
You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an
RETURN
MODE
DISPLAY
BAND
5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Access Point Scan access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an
access point” (p.70).
6
TUNING PRESET

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network You can set up a wireless connection by entering the
MOVIE MUSIC
required information (such as SSID) manually.
Connection” and press ENTER. Manual Setting
INFO SLEEP
For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless
1 2 3 4 connection manually” (p.70).
5
9
6
0
7
MEMORY
10 ENT
8
7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s
TV (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The
INPUT
PIN Code method is available if the wireless router (access point)
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings,
see “Using the PIN code” (p.71).
X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
En 69
Searching for an access point Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless
SOURCE RECEIVER
starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available connection setting screen appears on the TV.
1 2
AV
3 4
access points appears on the TV screen. You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and
5 6 7 V-AUX security key for your network.
1 2
AUDIO
3 4 1 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET access point and select “NEXT”. 1 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the
TUNER
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. access point and select “NEXT”.
ZONE
1
SCENE
2 3 4 2 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

ON
SCREEN OPTION
ENTER Cursor keys

ENTER
RETURN DISPLAY 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
MODE
BAND
security method of the access point and select “NEXT”.
TUNING PRESET
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP

3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
1 2 3 4
press ENTER to start the connection process.
5 6 7 8 When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
MEMORY
9 0
TV
10 ENT
the TV screen.
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
MUTE CODE SET
connection method.
Settings
4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
En 70
Using the PIN code
3 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available
and select “NEXT”.
SOURCE RECEIVER
access points appears on the TV screen.
AV If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed
1 2 3 4
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
to Step 4.
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26
1 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
1 2 3 4 access point and select “NEXT”.
hexadecimal digits.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
TUNER If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or
2
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
64 hexadecimal digits. Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
SCENE
1 2 3 4 point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
wireless router (access point).
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ON SCREEN
3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
press ENTER to start the connection process.
ENTER Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN DISPLAY the TV screen.
MODE
BAND 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
TUNING PRESET
press ENTER to start the connection process. connection method.
MOVIE MUSIC
4
INFO SLEEP
the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
TV
INPUT
5
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En 71
Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
SOURCE RECEIVER
Direct” and select “OK”.
RECEIVER z
1 2
AV
3 4
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
5 6 7 V-AUX
directly.
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
Y
Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly
TUNER encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected
ZONE
to the unit without permission.
SCENE
1 2 3 4
X
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

The checkmark indicates the current setting.

8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
Y
ON
SCREEN OPTION
desired security method and select “NEXT”.
ENTER Cursor keys Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
ENTER unit via HDMI.
RETURN DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
BAND
PRESET
3 Press ON SCREEN.
MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
MEMORY
8 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
9 0 10 ENT Settings
6
TV
INPUT
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network None, WPA2-PSK (AES)
TV VOL TV CH
Y
MUTE CODE SET
Connection” and press ENTER.

If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication
is not encrypted.
En 72
9 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key 11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
SOURCE RECEIVER
and select “NEXT”. For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
AV If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed instruction manual of the mobile device.
1 2 3 4
to Step 10.
5 6 7 V-AUX 1 Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
1 2
AUDIO
3 4
Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
2 Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
access points.
TUNER

ZONE
SCENE
3 When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
1 2 3 4 displayed in Step 10.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME 12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

ON
SCREEN OPTION
10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press

ENTER Cursor keys ENTER to save the setting.
ENTER
RETURN DISPLAY The settings made appear on the TV screen.
BAND
MODE
TUNING PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a

mobile device.
En 73
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network
SOURCE RECEIVER MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha,
1 2
AV
3 4
RECEIVER z
allowing you to share music among all of your rooms with a variety of 1 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
devices. You can enjoy music from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4
music streaming service anywhere in your house with one easy-to-use 2 Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on
application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast compatible your mobile device and tap “Setup”.
products, visit the Yamaha website.

TUNER

• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the
X
ZONE If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the
SCENE dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”. network, tap “Settings” and then “Add New Device”.
1 2 3 4
• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different
room and play them back simultaneously. 3 Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
following the on screen instructions, then hold down
• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music
streaming services may differ depending on your region and product.) CONNECT on the front panel of the unit for 5 seconds.
ON
SCREEN OPTION
ENTER
MusicCast CONTROLLER
RETURN DISPLAY
BAND
MODE CONNECT
TUNING PRESET

MOVIE
INFO
MUSIC
SLEEP
4 Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
1 2 3 4
To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you
following the onscreen instructions to set up the network.
5 6 7 8
need the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the
9
INPUT
0
TV
MEMORY
10 ENT
operation. Search for the free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on 5 Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to
MUTE
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET
the App Store or Google Play and install it to your device. playback.
Y
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network • AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB
cannot be delivered.
Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network. • If you configure the unit’s wireless settings with this method, the signal strength
You can also configure the unit’s wireless settings at once. indicator of the front display lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even
if a wired connection is used).
Y • You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit
• The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.
(MusicCast master). For details, see “MusicCast Link Power Interlock” (p.154) in the
• If your router supports multiple SSID’s (network names), connect the mobile device “Setup” menu.
to the first access point (“SSID 1”, etc.).
En 74
PLAYBACK
SOURCE RECEIVER
AV
1 2 3 4
Basic playback procedure
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
1 2 3 4 Input selection keys
On-screen input selection
1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD
a Press ON SCREEN.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
player) connected to the unit.
PARTY HDMI OUT
ZONE HDMI OUT b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
1
SCENE
2 3 4
MUTE 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press
ENTER.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME VOLUME 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.
Selecting an HDMI output jack
ON
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
SCREEN OPTION
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding

ENTER Cursor keys
ENTER
pages. 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
RETURN DISPLAY • Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for
BAND
Russia models) (p.84) signal output changes.
MODE
TUNING PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models HDMI OUT Sel. VOL.
only) (p.88)
INFO SLEEP
OUT 1+2 L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
1 2 3 4
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
only) (p.93) Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and
5 6 7 8 OUT 1+2
MEMORY HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
9 0
TV
10 ENT
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.97)
INPUT OUT 1
TV VOL TV CH • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.99) Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
MUTE CODE SET
OUT 2
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.103)
Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
• Listening to Internet radio (p.107)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.110) X
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.76).
4 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution
supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have
X connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack,
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL • If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.157), you can turn on/off each
on the front panel (p.125). zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.
En 75
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SOURCE RECEIVER The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
1 2
AV
3 4
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
1
5 6 7 V-AUX
1 2
AUDIO
3 4
Press SCENE.
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode.
TUNER

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
ZONE
SCENE
1 2 3 4 SCENE SCENE (SCENE key) 1 2 3 4
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

Input (p.75) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER
Input
Audio Select (p.128) Auto Auto - -
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.75) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2
ON
SCREEN OPTION
DSP Program (p.78) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 9ch Stereo 9ch Stereo

ENTER Cursor keys
Pure Direct Mode (p.148) Auto Auto Auto Auto
ENTER Mode
RETURN DISPLAY Enhancer (p.83) Off On On On
BAND
MODE Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.127) On On On On
TUNING PRESET
X
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
You can select SCENE 1-4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5-12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.132).
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 0
MEMORY
10 ENT
On-screen scene selection
TV
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER.
En 76
Registering a scene Selecting setting items to be included as
SOURCE
scene assignments
SOURCE
AV
RECEIVER
1 Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and

In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and
1 2 3 4
sound program) that you want to assign to a scene.
5 6 7 V-AUX
Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene
AUDIO
assignments in “Detail” (p.133) in the “Scene” menu.
1
PHONO
2
BLUETOOTH
3
USB NET
4 Input selection keys
2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete”
appears on the front display. Sound Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC, Extra Bass
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level,

SCENE1
PARTY HDMI OUT
ZONE Surround
VOL. Subwoofer Trim
1
SCENE
2 3 4 SCENE SET Complete L C R

SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
Video Video Mode, Video Adjustment
Volume Master Volume

PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME 3 If you want to control the corresponding playback device
Lipsync Lipsync, Delay
after selecting the scene, hold down the corresponding
Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
ON
SCENE key and input selection key together for more than
OPTION
X
SCREEN
3 seconds.
ENTER
When the input source is TUNER, USB or NET, the selected radio station or content is
Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
assigned.
RETURN DISPLAY
MODE
BAND X
TUNING PRESET • If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT “Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.169) to register it.
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device
1 2 3 4
connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device
5 6 7 8
type in “Device Control” (p.133) in the “Scene” menu.
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
En 77
Selecting the sound mode
SOURCE RECEIVER The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
AV decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite
1 2 3 4
a Press ON SCREEN.
sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback).
5 6 7
b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
V-AUX
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder
• Press MOVIE repeatedly. and press ENTER.

TUNER
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
X
ZONE
SCENE video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.79). • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM.
Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME PROGRAM
• Press MUSIC repeatedly. “DSP Program” menu (p.135).
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
ON
SCREEN OPTION
music sources or stereo playback (p.80). • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.15) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
ENTER Cursor keys
Selecting a surround decoder the “Information” menu (p.161).
ENTER
RETURN DISPLAY • Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly.
Precaution for enjoying Dolby Atmos®
BAND
MODE This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from • Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in
TUNING PRESET
MOVIE 2-channel sources (p.82). the following situations. (Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as
MOVIE MUSIC
MUSIC Dolby Atmos.)
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SUR.DECODE
INFO SLEEP
STRAIGHT Switching to the straight decode mode – Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
1 2 3 4 ENHANCER – Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
PURE DIRECT • Press STRAIGHT.
5 6 7 8
• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.81) does not work.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
(p.82).
MUTE CODE SET
Switching to the Pure Direct mode Precaution for enjoying DTS:X™

• When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue
• Press PURE DIRECT. sounds in “DTS Dialogue Control” (p.126) in the “Option” menu.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the • When the DTS:X decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.83). Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.81) does not work.
Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer

• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and
breadth (p.83).
En 78
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV
programs, and games.
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP MOVIE THEATER
technology (CINEMA DSP HD3). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie
theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without
disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio. Its design is
Standard
Sound program category based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
MUSIC CLASSICAL This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions.
VOL.
HD 3 Hall in Vienna FPL L C R FPR

SL SW1 SR
Spectacle
It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and
boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds
Sound program to powerful loud booms.
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest
Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created
X Sci-Fi
virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects,
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.148) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. and background music.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space
Adventure
speakers for further spatial sounds). expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and
powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce separation of the channels.
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers.
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are
unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the Drama modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are
rear sound field. reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the
dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an
atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space
Mono Movie
with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original
audio.
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the dynamic sound transition
of 3D object audio. Its design is based on the concept of a movie theater with
Enhanced
multi-top speakers, in which the audience is overwhelmed by the natural and
powerful sound effects.
En 79
ENTERTAINMENT ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and
light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
Sports are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is
You can also select stereo playback.
realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a
suitable space.
CLASSICAL
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games.
The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
Action Game right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread
Hall in Munich
and strong sound field. richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds
depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox
Roleplaying Game music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
Hall in Vienna
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich
spatial sound field. sound.
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Hall in Amsterdam
were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Music Video the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed
emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that
tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling
reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Church in Freiburg enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus,
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of the church.
an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a
Recital/Opera positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is Church in
beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of
relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the Royaumont
Paris.
inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of
opera entertainment. This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience
Chamber hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly
music and chamber music.
En 80
LIVE/CLUB ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling
Village Vanguard If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) when no surround
makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center.
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to
Warehouse Loft
walls clearly with a lot of energy. reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to
Cellar Club atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los X
Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous
The Bottom Line New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a ■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you
STEREO
can place them in the front (p.24) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When CINEMA FRONT.
2ch Stereo multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output When “Layout (Surround)” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the
from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then
9ch Stereo
outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field
and is ideal for background music at parties.
X
When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
Y
CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.79) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.81) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo
headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound
program or a surround decoder.
En 81
Enjoying unprocessed playback
1 Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder.
SOURCE RECEIVER
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes.
processing.
SUR. DECODE
AV
1 2 3 4
VOL.
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
■ Playing back in original channels †‡ Dsur L C R

SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
1 2 3 4
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET (straight decode) Uses the decoder automatically selected by input
source. The DTS Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS
TUNER
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo Auto
sources and the Dolby Surround decoder is selected
ZONE sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and for other sources.
SCENE
1 2 3 4
produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. Uses the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for your
speaker layout. A real acoustic space (including
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

1 Press STRAIGHT. bDsur overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled played.
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU or disabled. Uses the DTS Neural:X decoder suitable for your
ON
SCREEN OPTION speaker layout. A real acoustic space (including
STRAIGHT VOL.
Neural:X overhead) will be created especially when
ENTER
L C R
SL SW1 SR
object-based audio (such as DTS:X content) is
SBL SBR
played.
RETURN DISPLAY
MODE
BAND Y Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output
TUNING PRESET
SUR.DECODE • To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back
speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.82).
from the surround/surround back speakers.
MOVIE MUSIC
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • If “Layout (Surround)” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
INFO SLEEP
FRONT (p.81) works when multichannel source is played back.

Neo:6 Music decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
1 2 3 4
from the surround/surround back speakers.
5 6 7 8
Y
MEMORY
9 0
TV
10 ENT
■ Playing back in extended multichannel
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET
(surround decoder) • If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back speaker is
used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except when a Dolby
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from Atmos content or a DTS:X content is played).
2-channel or multichannel sources.
• When the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround
X processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.81) does not work.
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and
the selected decode type (p.136).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.184).
En 82
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound Playing back digitally compressed formats
(Pure Direct) (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
SOURCE RECEIVER
AV
When Pure Direct is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with
(Compressed Music Enhancer)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX
the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other
1 2
AUDIO
3 4
circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound
quality.
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound,
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
1 Press PURE DIRECT. allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before
it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound
SCENE
Each time you press the key, Pure Direct is enabled or disabled.
1 2 3 4 modes.
PURE DIRECT VOL.

In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME L R
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when
“Hi-Res Mode” (p.127) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default).
Y
ON
SCREEN OPTION When Pure Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
1 Press ENHANCER.
ENTER
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is
– Operating the on-screen menu and “Option” menu
RETURN DISPLAY – Using the multi-zone function enabled or disabled.
BAND – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
MODE
TUNING PRESET
Enhancer On VOL.
L C R
Hi-Res ENHANCER SL SW1 SR
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SBL SBR
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
PURE DIRECT “ENHANCER” lights up
1 2 3 4 ENHANCER
5 6 7
MEMORY
8
Y
9 0 10 ENT Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
MUTE CODE SET
– DSD audio
X
You can also use “Enhancer” (p.127) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
En 83
Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio Setting the frequency steps
stations.
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Y At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation
of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.S.A. model. on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas.
1 Set the unit to standby mode.
2 When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
3 Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”.
TUNER FRQ STEP

FM50/AM9
4 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5 Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
En 84
Selecting a frequency for reception Registering favorite radio stations
(presets)
1
SOURCE
2
AV
RECEIVER
3 4
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4
2 Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
preset numbers.
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET FM 87.50MHz VOL.
X
TUNER TUNER You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
ZONE “Auto Preset” (p.96).
1
SCENE
2 3 4 3 Use the following keys to set a frequency.

TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for ■ Registering a radio station
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME about a second to search stations automatically. Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select
ON
OPTION
98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.85) to
SCREEN
tune into the desired radio station.
ENTER
FM 98.50MHz VOL.
2
STEREO TUNED L C R
SL SW1 SR
SBL SBR
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
RETURN DISPLAY
BAND “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
MODE
BAND
TUNING PRESET
PRESET
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
TUNING
Y
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range.
1 2 3 4
number.
5
9
6
0
7
MEMORY
10 ENT
8 Numeric keys
MEMORY
X Preset number
TV
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
INPUT
reception in “FM Mode” (p.128) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an Preset
MUTE
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET
FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. 01:FM 98.50MHz VOL.
STEREO TUNED
Preset OK L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
Preset 01:Empty VOL.
STEREO TUNED
FM 98.50MHz L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
En 85
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
SOURCE RECEIVER
1 2
AV
3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX
1 2
AUDIO
3 4 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET station.
TUNER TUNER You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the
ZONE
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
SCENE
1 2 3 4
Preset 01:FM 98.50MHz VOL.
STEREO TUNED L C R
SL SW1 SR
SBL SBR
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
Y
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
ON
SCREEN OPTION
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
ENTER • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
RETURN DISPLAY
X
MODE
BAND
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.96).
TUNING PRESET
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 Numeric keys
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
En 86
Operating the radio on the TV ■ Browse screen
SOURCE RECEIVER
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.
a
AV
1 2 3 4
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
The playback screen is displayed on the TV. c

1 2 3 4
b
TUNER TUNER ■ Playback screen
ZONE
SCENE b a Preset station list

1 2 3 4 a Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
c b Preset number
c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
ON
SCREEN OPTION
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENTER Menu operation keys
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Cursor keys a Radio station information
RETURN DISPLAY ENTER Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band Menu Submenu Function
BAND
RETURN (FM/AM) and frequency.
MODE Registers the current station to the preset
Memory
TUNING PRESET
b TUNED/STEREO indicators number selected in the list.
MOVIE MUSIC “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. Automatically registers FM radio stations
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Auto Preset
INFO SLEEP “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. Utility with strong signals (up to 40 stations).
1 2 3 4
c Operation menu Clear the preset station selected in the
Clear Preset
5 6 7 8
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. list.
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the
1 Page Down list.
Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
Closes the screen display and shows the background. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Closes the screen display and shows the
Screen Off background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
En 87
Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Preparing the DAB tuning
SOURCE RECEIVER
Europe and Russia models only) Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to
AV
perform an initial scan.
1 2 3 4 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4
and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also
receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH USB NET
TUNER
using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient
transmission method.
2 Press BAND to select the DAB band.
MAIN 2 3 4 PARTY HDMI OUT The following message appears on the front panel if you have not
Y
ZONE
SCENE performed an initial scan yet.

1 2 3 4 • The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being Init Scan VOL.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check Press [ENTER]
WorldDMB online at http://www.worlddab.org/.
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
X 3 Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.48).
ENTER ENTER
Init Scan VOL.
RETURN DISPLAY
>>>------- 30%
BAND When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the
MODE
BAND
TUNING PRESET first DAB radio station as stored in station order.
MOVIE MUSIC

DAB BBC Radio 4
INFO SLEEP VOL.
L C R
SL SW1 SR
1 2 3 4 SBL SBR
X
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
INPUT
TV
• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1
MUTE
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET
appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.91).
• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.124) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan
again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
be cleared.
En 88
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception Registering favorite DAB radio stations
You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial
(presets)
SOURCE RECEIVER
scan.
1 2
AV
3 4
You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4
preset numbers.
2 Press BAND to select the DAB band. X

TUNER TUNER You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
ZONE
SCENE
3 Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station.
1 2 3 4
DAB
■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets
BBC Radio 4 VOL.
Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
Daily Service L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR

Y 1 Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”
ON
• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not (p.89) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.
SCREEN OPTION
available.
ENTER • When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.
2 Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
RETURN DISPLAY
Secondary station The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
BAND
DAB 2 station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
MODE
TUNING PRESET
BAND
BBC National VOL.
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
PRESET L C R
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SL SW1 SR
SBL SBR
MOVIE MUSIC TUNING (unused) preset number after the most recently registered
INFO
1
SLEEP
2 3 4
X number.
You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by Preset number
5 6 7 8
MEMORY selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.128) in the “Option” menu.
9 0 10 ENT MEMORY
TV
Preset 01:BBC Radio 4
INPUT VOL.
MUTE
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET Preset OK L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
X
the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)
BBC Radio 4 L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
En 89
■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station Displaying the DAB information
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.
SOURCE RECEIVER
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned
1 2
AV
3 4
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. into a DAB radio station.
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4 2 Press BAND to select the DAB band. 1 Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH USB NET
TUNER 3 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio 2 Press INFO.
station. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
ZONE
SCENE
1 2 3 4
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the Info VOL.
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

Program Type L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
PRESET:01
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
VOL.
Item name
L C R
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the

SL SW1 SR
SBL SBR
displayed item appears.

Y
ON
SCREEN OPTION
• “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered. DAB
ENTER
Classic FM VOL.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

RETURN DISPLAY Classic Music L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
BAND
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
MODE
BAND Information
X
TUNING PRESET
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.87). DLS
INFO SLEEP INFO (Dynamic Label Information on the current station
1 2 3 4
Segment)
5 6 7 8
Ensemble Label Ensemble name
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV Program Type Station genre
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET Date And Time Current date and time
Audio Mode Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate
CH Label/Freq. Channel label and frequency
Signal Quality Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
X
Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio
station.
En 90
Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label
SOURCE RECEIVER
1 2
AV
3 4
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to
5 6 7 V-AUX
100 [best]).
AUDIO
1
1 2 3 4

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
TUNER TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
2 Press BAND to select the DAB band.
SCENE
1 2 3 4
3 Press OPTION.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
4 Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER.
5
ON Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB

SCREEN OPTION OPTION
channel label.
ENTER Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN DISPLAY
Tune AID VOL.
MODE
BAND
BAND
12B Level: 80 L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
TUNING PRESET
DAB channel label Reception strength
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO
1
SLEEP
2 3 4
6 To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
En 91
■ DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
Frequency Channel label Frequency Channel label
174.928 MHz 5A 225.648 MHz 12B
176.640 MHz 5B 227.360 MHz 12C
178.352 MHz 5C 229.072 MHz 12D
180.064 MHz 5D 230.784 MHz 13A
181.936 MHz 6A 232.496 MHz 13B
183.648 MHz 6B 234.208 MHz 13C
185.360 MHz 6C 235.776 MHz 13D
187.072 MHz 6D 237.488 MHz 13E
188.928 MHz 7A 239.200 MHz 13F
190.640 MHz 7B
192.352 MHz 7C
194.064 MHz 7D
195.936 MHz 8A
197.648 MHz 8B
199.360 MHz 8C
201.072 MHz 8D
202.928 MHz 9A
204.640 MHz 9B
206.352 MHz 9C
208.064 MHz 9D
209.936 MHz 10A
211.648 MHz 10B
213.360 MHz 10C
215.072 MHz 10D
216.928 MHz 11A
218.640 MHz 11B
220.352 MHz 11C
222.064 MHz 11D
223.936 MHz 12A
En 92
Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
SOURCE RECEIVER You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting Registering favorite FM radio stations
AV from registered radio stations.
1 2 3 4
(presets)
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
Y
1 2 3 4 If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the DAB/FM You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET antennas. registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
TUNER TUNER preset numbers.
ZONE
SCENE
Selecting a frequency for reception X
1 2 3 4 You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.96).
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

■ Registering a radio station

TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 2 Press BAND to select the FM band.
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
ON
SCREEN OPTION
FM 87.50MHz VOL.
ENTER
1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.93) to
RETURN DISPLAY
tune into the desired radio station.
BAND
3 Use the following keys to set a frequency.
BAND
2
MODE
TUNING PRESET
PRESET TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
MOVIE MUSIC

TUNING about a second to search stations automatically. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
INFO SLEEP
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
1 2 3 4
98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
9 0
MEMORY
10 ENT
MEMORY (unused) preset number after the most recently registered
INPUT
TV
FM 98.50MHz VOL.
number.
TV VOL TV CH STEREO TUNED L C R
SL SW1 SR
MUTE CODE SET
SBL SBR
Preset number
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
Preset 01:FM 98.50MHz VOL.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. STEREO TUNED
Preset OK L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
Y X
“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range.
X the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio press MEMORY again.
reception in “FM Mode” (p.128) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
STEREO TUNED
FM 98.50MHz L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
En 93
■ Selecting a preset station Radio Data System tuning
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
SOURCE RECEIVER
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
1 2
AV
3 4
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in
many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System
5 6 7 V-AUX
1 2
AUDIO
3 4 2 Press BAND to select the FM band data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text” and
“Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting
TUNER

TUNER 3 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station.
ZONE station.
1
SCENE
2 3 4
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the ■ Displaying the Radio Data System
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. information
Preset 01:FM 98.50MHz 1
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
VOL. Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting

STEREO TUNED L C R
station.
SL SW1 SR
SBL SBR
Y
ON
X
SCREEN OPTION
ENTER • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. broadcasting stations (p.96).
RETURN DISPLAY

2
BAND
MODE
BAND Press INFO.
X
TUNING PRESET
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.96). Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
INFO SLEEP INFO
1 2 3 4 Info VOL.
5 6 7
MEMORY
8 Numeric keys
STEREO TUNED
Program Type L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
9 0 10 ENT
INPUT
TV
Item name
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
displayed item appears.
Frequency (always displayed)
FM 98.50MHz VOL.
STEREO TUNED
CLASSICS L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
Information
En 94
Program Service Program service name Operating the radio on the TV
Program Type Current program type
SOURCE RECEIVER
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.
Radio Text Information on the current program
AV
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
V-AUX
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
AUDIO The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
1 2 3 4
Audio Decoder Decoder name
■ Playback screen
TUNER

TUNER
Y
ZONE
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
SCENE b
1 2 3 4
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. a
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

仮画面 c
ON
SCREEN OPTION

Cursor keys a Radio station information
RETURN DISPLAY ENTER Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band
BAND (DAB/FM) and frequency.
MODE
TUNING PRESET (U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
MOVIE MUSIC
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.94), the Radio
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text”
INFO SLEEP
and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 b TUNED/STEREO indicators
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
TV
INPUT “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
c Operation menu
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
Closes the screen display and shows the background.

Screen Off
En 95
■ Browse screen
SOURCE RECEIVER
a
AV
1 2 3 4
5 6
AUDIO
7 V-AUX
c
1 2 3 4
b
TUNER

ZONE
SCENE a Preset station list

1 2 3 4 Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME b Preset number
c Operation menu
ON
SCREEN OPTION
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Cursor keys
RETURN DISPLAY ENTER Menu Submenu Function
BAND
RETURN
MODE Registers the current station to the preset
Memory
TUNING PRESET
number selected in the list.
MOVIE MUSIC
Automatically registers FM radio stations
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Auto Preset
INFO SLEEP
Utility with strong signals (up to 40 stations).
1 2 3 4
Clear the preset station selected in the
Clear Preset
5 6 7 8
list.
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the
1 Page Down list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Closes the screen display and shows the

Screen Off background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
Y
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
En 96
Playing back music via Bluetooth
SOURCE RECEIVER You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
AV smartphones) on the unit. Also, you can enjoy audio played back on the
1 2 3 4
unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

unit
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
1 2 3 4 Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET BLUETOOTH between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and
TUNER play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.
Y
ZONE
SCENE The unit Bluetooth device

1 2 3 4 (such as smartphones) The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME 1 Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input

source.
ON
SCREEN OPTION
2 On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of

ENTER The unit the unit) from the available device list.
RETURN DISPLAY
Bluetooth speakers/ A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be
headphones
BAND
made.
Y
MODE
TUNING PRESET External device

operation keys If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
MOVIE MUSIC
• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.154) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
3
• You cannot make Bluetooth connections to a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones)
INFO SLEEP
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.
1 2 3 4 and Bluetooth speakers/headphones at the same time.
5 6 7 8 The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is
• Stand the wireless antenna upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly.
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
For details, see “Preparing the wireless antenna” (p.50). displayed on the TV.
TV
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET X X
For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” • If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically
(p.188). connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth
connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.

– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Setup menu items” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
En 97
Enjoying audio using Bluetooth
speakers/headphones
4 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
SOURCE RECEIVER
Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
1 2
AV
3 4
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
5 6 7 V-AUX
between Bluetooth speakers/headphones and the unit, and enjoy audio
1 2
AUDIO
3 4 Input selection keys played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH USB NET
Y
• To use this function, set “Transmitter” (p.155) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
ZONE
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
SCENE
1 2 3 4
1 Use the input selection keys (except BLUETOOTH) to

X
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME select an input source. The checkmark indicates the Bluetooth device currently selected.
ON
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 2 Press ON SCREEN. 5 While the Bluetooth speakers/headphones are in the
SCREEN OPTION
pairing mode, use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT”
ENTER Cursor keys
ENTER
3 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Setup” ! and press ENTER.
RETURN DISPLAY
“Bluetooth” ! “Audio Send” ! “Device Search” and
BAND “OK”.
MODE
TUNING PRESET
The list of available Bluetooth devices (BD addresses) is displayed.
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH When the connection process finishes, audio played back on the
MUTE CODE SET
unit will be reproduced from the Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
X
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform the disconnect operation on the
Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, input sources other than the network sources
and USB cannot be delivered.
En 98
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. Connecting a USB storage device
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format).
X 1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.188).
The unit (front)
(CONNECT)
PROGRAM
ENTER
RETURN DISPLAY
PHONES
USB
5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA
USB storage device
USB VOL.
Connected L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
X
If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears
in the front display.
Y
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.
• The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.
En 99
Playback of USB storage device contents
2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
AV
and start playback. displayed.
1 2 3 4
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO TV screen.
1 2 3 4
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH USB NET USB
1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen,
ON
SCREEN OPTION
hold down RETURN.
ENTER Cursor keys • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
ENTER
X • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
MODE
BAND
If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
TUNING PRESET
displayed. • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT selecting the shortcut numbers (p.118).
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
En 100
■ Browse screen ■ Playback screen
a a
b
SOURCE RECEIVER
b
AV
1 2 3 4 c
c
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO e
1 2 3 4
TUNER
d
ZONE
SCENE a Status indicators a Status indicators

1 2 3 4
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.102) and playback status (such as Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.102) and playback status (such as
play/pause). play/pause).
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
b List name b Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
c Contents list
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
ON
SCREEN OPTION
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. c Operation menu
ENTER Menu operation keys d Item number/total
Cursor keys Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
RETURN DISPLAY ENTER e Operation menu
BAND Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Menu Function
MODE
TUNING PRESET External device Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.
operation keys
MOVIE MUSIC
Menu Function Closes the screen display and shows the background.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Screen Off
INFO SLEEP Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
1 Page Up
1 2 3 4
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
5 6 7
MEMORY
8 1 Page Down
X
9 0
TV
10 ENT
10 Pages Up You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
INPUT Moves 10 pages forward/backward. control to control playback.
MUTE
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Screen Off
En 101
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage
SOURCE RECEIVER
device contents.
AV
1
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
AUDIO
1 2 3 4 OPTION.
TUNER

2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
ZONE “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
SCENE
1 2 3 4
X
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
ON
SCREEN
OPTION OPTION
3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
ENTER Cursor keys Item Setting Function

ENTER
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
BAND
Shuffle Plays back songs in the current album
MODE
(Shuffle) On (On) (folder) in random order.
TUNING PRESET

“x” appears on the TV screen.
MOVIE MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4 Plays back the current song repeatedly.

One (One)
5 6 7 8
Repeat “c” appears on the TV screen.
MEMORY (Repeat)
9 0 10 ENT
Plays back all songs in the current
TV
INPUT All (All) album (folder) repeatedly.
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET “v” appears on the TV screen.
En 102
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
Y installed
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.50). You can check whether Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network Connection”
settings.
(p.152) in the “Information” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network
connection.
X
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.188).
Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure
the media sharing setting on each music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed

The setting procedure may vary depending on the PC and Windows Media Player version (The
following procedure is a setup example for Windows Media Player 12).
1 Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
2 Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
3 Click “Turn on media streaming”.
4 Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name.
5 Click “OK” to exit.
X
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
En 103
Playback of PC music contents
3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
SOURCE RECEIVER
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
AV
playback. displayed.
1 2 3 4
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
1
PHONO
2
BLUETOOTH
3
USB NET
4
NET
1 Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input
TUNER
source.
ZONE The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

X
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen, hold down
ON
SCREEN OPTION
RETURN.
ENTER Cursor keys • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
ENTER
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
RETURN DISPLAY
BAND
RETURN
X during playback, playback stops automatically.
MODE If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
TUNING PRESET • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
playback screen is displayed.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT selecting the shortcut numbers (p.118).
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO
1
SLEEP
2
3 4
2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press
ENTER.
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
En 104
a a
b
SOURCE RECEIVER
AV
b
1 2 3 4 c
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO e c
1 2 3 4
TUNER
d
ZONE
SCENE a Status indicators a Status indicators

1 2 3 4
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.106) and playback status (such as Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.106) and playback status (such as
play/pause). play/pause).
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
c Contents list
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and
ON
SCREEN OPTION
press ENTER to confirm the selection. c Operation menu
ENTER Menu operation keys d Item number/total Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Cursor keys Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
RETURN DISPLAY ENTER e Operation menu
BAND
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Menu Function
MODE
TUNING PRESET External device Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.
operation keys
MOVIE MUSIC
Menu Function Closes the screen display and shows the background.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Screen Off
INFO SLEEP Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
1 Page Up
1 2 3 4
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
5
9
6
0
7
MEMORY
10 ENT
8 1 Page Down
X
TV
10 Pages Up • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
INPUT Moves 10 pages forward/backward. playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).
TV VOL TV CH 10 Pages Down
MUTE CODE SET
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.131).

Screen Off
En 105
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
SOURCE RECEIVER
music content.
AV
1
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 V-AUX
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press
AUDIO
1 2 3 4 OPTION.
TUNER

2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
ZONE “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
SCENE
1 2 3 4
X
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
ON
SCREEN
OPTION OPTION
ENTER Cursor keys Item Setting Function

ENTER
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
BAND
Shuffle Plays back songs in the current album
MODE
(Shuffle) On (On) (folder) in random order.
TUNING PRESET

“x” appears on the TV screen.
MOVIE MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4 Plays back the current song repeatedly.

One (One)
5 6 7 8
Repeat “c” appears on the TV screen.
MEMORY (Repeat)
9 0 10 ENT
Plays back all songs in the current
TV
INPUT All (All) album (folder) repeatedly.
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET “v” appears on the TV screen.
En 106
Listening to Internet radio
SOURCE RECEIVER You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. Playback of Internet radio
Y
AV
1 2 3 4
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.50). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to 1 Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input
the unit in “Network” (p.152) in the “Information” menu. source.
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET NET
TUNER
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
ZONE
• The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.
SCENE
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
1 2 3 4
• Folder names are different depending on the language.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
ON
SCREEN OPTION
ENTER Cursor keys
RETURN DISPLAY
ENTER
RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
MODE
BAND
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the
TUNING PRESET
playback screen is displayed.
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
X
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.118).
En 107
a a
b
SOURCE RECEIVER
AV
b
1 2 3 4 c
c
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO e
1 2 3 4
TUNER
d
ZONE
SCENE a Playback indicator a Playback indicator

1 2 3 4
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
c Contents list
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. c Operation menu
d Item number/total Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
ON
OPTION
SCREEN
e Operation menu
Cursor keys
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Menu Function
RETURN DISPLAY ENTER Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Add to favorites Adds the current station to the “Favorites” folder (p.109).
BAND
MODE
TUNING PRESET External device Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen.
operation keys
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT Add to favorites Closes the screen display and shows the background.
MOVIE MUSIC Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the Screen Off
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT (Remove from Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
INFO SLEEP “Favorites” folder (p.109).
favorites)
X
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
1 Page Up
MEMORY
Moves to the previous/next page of the list. • You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
9 0 10 ENT 1 Page Down
TV playback.
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH 10 Pages Up
MUTE CODE SET
Moves 10 pages forward/backward. • Some information may not be available depending on the station.
10 Pages Down

Screen Off
En 108
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites)
SOURCE RECEIVER
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Favorites”, you
AV
can quickly access to them from the “Favorites” folder in the browse
1 2 3 4
screen.
5 6 7 V-AUX
1 2
AUDIO
3 4 X
You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input
TUNER
source as shortcuts (p.118).
ZONE
1
SCENE
2 3 4
■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
1
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse

TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU screen or start playback of it to display the playback
ON
SCREEN OPTION
screen.
ENTER Cursor keys
RETURN DISPLAY
ENTER
2 Press the cursor key (r) to select “Add to favorites” and
BAND
press ENTER.
MODE
TUNING PRESET
The selected station is added to the “Favorites” folder.
MOVIE MUSIC Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “S”.
INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
Browse screen
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
X
To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select
“Remove from favorites”.
En 109
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
iTunes
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
PC
Router
1 Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen
(wired or wireless)
The unit
on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon appears.
iTunes (example) iOS 10 (example)
(wired or wireless)
iPhone/iPad/iPod touch
Y
If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
Y
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.162) in the 2 On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network
“Information” menu. name of the unit) as the audio output device.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect.
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. 3 Select a song and start playback.
X The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.188).
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.121).
X
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby”
(p.153) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name”
(p.154) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from
iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.131) in the “Input” menu to “Off”.
Caution
When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could
result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop
playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately.
En 110
■ Playback screen
SOURCE RECEIVER
a
AV
b
1 2 3 4
c
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
TUNER

ZONE
SCENE a Playback indicator

1 2 3 4
b Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ON
SCREEN OPTION
Menu Function
Cursor keys Closes the screen display and shows the background.
ENTER Screen Off
RETURN DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING PRESET

External device
operation keys X
MOVIE MUSIC You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
INFO SLEEP control to control playback.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
En 111
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the ■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms
unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).
You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can
listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
(Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).
• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each Video (HDMI)
zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.190).
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

Multi-zone configuration examples
Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we
Guest room
recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center (Zone2)
about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.
■ Enjoying music in other rooms Connections

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms. TV: p.114
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.39
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.113
Enjoying videos/music using only a TV

Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Study room Video/audio (HDMI)

(Zone2 and/or Zone3)
Connections Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.39
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.113
Connection
TV: p.114
En 112
Preparing the multi zone system Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and
Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.
connect speakers to the external amplifier.
Caution The unit (rear)

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier. HDMI OUT
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
ZONE OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
• Ensure that the bare wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 1
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks
Y PB PR
the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short
A
VIDEO ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Y
B
AV 2 PB PR
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (F
L
L
R
R
ZONE 2/ ZONE 3/ (R
2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB
5 COAXIAL
■ Connecting speakers to play back audio R SURROUND L
ZONE 2 /
F.PRESENSE
R
SURROUND
ZONE 3 /
R.PRESENSE
DIO 4 ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The connection method varies
L
FM AM
75ȍ
External amplifier
depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier). Audio input
(analog stereo)
Using the unit’s internal amplifier L
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see R
“Connecting Zone2/3 speakers” (p.39). AUDIO
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
Y
(RX-A3070 only)
You cannot use an external amplifier for Zone2 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are set to output front
presence channel audio in “Power Amp Assign” (p.142) in the “Setup” menu. Also, you cannot use an external
amplifier for Zone3 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are configured to output rear presence channel audio.
X
You can adjust the volume for Zone2 and Zone3 output with the unit. When using an external amplifier with
volume control, set “Volume” (p.156) in the “Setup” menu to “Fixed”.
En 113
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back X
videos/audio • When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output from the
HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Zone2 - Audio Output” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2 or
• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.39).
Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multichannel playback in another room
(Zone4). • Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
Y – Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to the
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
unit with an HDMI cable (p.44).
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
• On-screen menu operations are not available for Zone2 and Zone4.
HDMI OUT 2 (Example: using a TV)

The unit (rear) (ZONE OUT) jack
HDMI input
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2 HDMI (HDCP HDMI
2 1 AV 1 AV 2 (ZONE
AV 3 OUT) AV
HDMI HDMI
(1 BD/DVD) AV 1
Y PB PR
A
VIDEO
B
Y AV 2 PB PR
1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
) ZONE OUT/PRE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE)
L
ZONE 2/ ZONE 3/
2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK
CAL 5 COAXIAL
R SURROUND L R
SURROU
AUDIO 4 ANTENNA
L (4 RADIO)
FM AM
75ȍ
Zone2 or Zone4
(Example: using an AV amplifier)

HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI
Main zone Zone4
To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157)
in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.
En 114
■ Operating the unit from another room Remote connections between Yamaha products
(remote connection) An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the supplied remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting
remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver.
jacks.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
X REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
IN
To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for each
OUT OUT
device before using (p.168).
The unit (rear) REMOTE IN/OUT jacks Infrared signal

receiver
2
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
NETWO
( 3 NET
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)

1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO TRIGGER
DVD)
Y AV 1 PB PR OUT
A
1
12V 0.1A
REMOTE REMOTE
MAX. TOTAL IN OUT
2
B IN OUT
Y AV 2 PB PR
Remote control
1

6 OPTICAL F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER
AXIAL 5 COAXIAL
SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP2
R SURROUND L R L R L CENTER
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
FM AM
5ȍ SINGLE
Infrared signal Infrared signal

transmitter receiver
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Main zone
En 115
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
4 Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.
1
SOURCE
2
AV
RECEIVER
3 4
RECEIVER z 1 Use the ZONE switch to select a zone. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX

2 Press RECEIVER z.
pages.
Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled or
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET • Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
disabled.
TUNER Russia models) (p.84)
MAIN 2 3 4 PARTY HDMI OUT When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding zone
ZONE ZONE • Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
indicator lights up in the front display.
SCENE
only) (p.88)
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

3 Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
only) (p.93)
Y • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.97)
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU • Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.99)
ON
SCREEN OPTION
connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
“Multi-zone output” (p.190). • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.103)
ENTER
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each • Listening to Internet radio (p.107)
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected
RETURN DISPLAY • Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.110)
BAND
for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to
Y
MODE
TUNING PRESET
“SERVER”.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT • You can also use the web control (p.119) to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing
1 2 3 4
in the main zone.
5
9
6
0
7
MEMORY
10 ENT
8
X
TV • The Zone2/Zone3 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the
MUTE CODE SET
Zone2/Zone3 input with the web control (p.119) or AV CONTROLLER (p.12).
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the
Zone2/Zone3 input or use the party mode (p.117).
Caution
To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.
En 116
■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
Zone4 rooms (party mode)
SOURCE RECEIVER
The following functions are also available when the zone you want to The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same music that
AV
1 2 3 4 operate is enabled. is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo
5 6 7 V-AUX playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function
1 2
AUDIO
3 4
Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only) when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET Press VOLUME or MUTE. party.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
PARTY
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE) 1 Press PARTY.
SCENE
Press SCENE. Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off.
1 2 3 4 SCENE
X When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME VOLUME To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold display.
down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. (Only
MUTE
an input source can be registered for Zone4.) X
ON
You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode Set” (p.157)
SCREEN OPTION
Setting the sleep timer in the “Setup” menu.
Y
ENTER
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
RETURN DISPLAY off). Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone.
BAND
MODE
TUNING PRESET
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with
MOVIE MUSIC enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
INFO SLEEP ENHANCER Press ENHANCER.
1 2 3 4 SLEEP
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
En 117
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
SOURCE RECEIVER You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth Recalling a registered item
AV input source as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the
1 2 3 4
shortcut numbers. Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.

5 6 7 V-AUX
X
AUDIO
1
1 2 3 4
Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.

PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET BLUETOOTH • You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.109).
USB
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
2
TUNER
NET
contents cannot be registered.
Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number (01 to 40).
ZONE
SCENE
You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a shortcut.
1 2 3 4
Registering an item Recall Preset VOL.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.

01:USB L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR

Y
ON
SCREEN OPTION
1 Play back a song or a radio station to be registered. • “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
ENTER
RETURN DISPLAY
2 Press MEMORY. • The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the
MODE
BAND
Memory Preset VOL. unit.
TUNING PRESET
01:Empty L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the
MOVIE MUSIC
network.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Shortcut number (flashes) – The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.
INFO SLEEP
5
2
6
3
7
4
8 Numeric keys
X – The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use numeric
9 0
MEMORY
10 ENT
MEMORY • When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit
keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.
INPUT
TV
memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or
TV VOL TV CH
deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file
MUTE CODE SET
Memory Preset VOL.
correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
02:Empty L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
• The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered and easily recalled by using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.74) on your mobile device.
3 To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
En 118
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
X
• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.162) in the “Information” menu.
Web browser
• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.121) to access the web
control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may
change each time the unit is turned on.
Web control Web control • If you have enabled the MAC Address Filter (p.153), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the
PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction
(wired or wireless) (wired or wireless) manual.
PC Router The unit • By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone,
Y iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.12).
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases,
configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode,
set “Network Standby” (p.121) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 11.x
– Safari 9.x
1 Start the web browser.
2 Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)
En 119
Top menu screen Control screen
e d
a a
f e
b
c g b f
d
a CONTROL a PLAY INFO
Moves to the control screen for the selected zone. Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.
b STATUS b TOP MENU

Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone. Moves to the top menu screen.
c SETTINGS c SCENE
Moves to the settings screen. Selects a scene for the selected zone.
d PARTY MODE d POWER

Turns on/off the party mode (p.117). Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.
e SYSTEM POWER e VOLUME

Turns on/off the power for all zones. Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments
used for volume adjustment.
f MAIN VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used
f RELOAD
for volume adjustment. Reloads the current status of the unit.
g RELOAD Y
Reloads the current status of the unit. • Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment on the web control may not work on the unit depending on the unit’s settings.
En 120
Settings screen Google Analytics
Displays an explanation of data collection by Google Analytics. Data collection can be enabled or
disabled at any time.
b BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.
a c RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices
b c correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other
external devices.
a Rename • Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.154) or the name of each zone (p.155). Click settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. • The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).
Network
• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.
Selects the network connection method (p.152) or configures the network parameters (such as IP
address) (p.152). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.110). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to
the unit.
MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.153) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to
apply the changes to the unit.
Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen
reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.
Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.153).
Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.
Firmware
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.
Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.
Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.
Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.
En 121
Viewing the current status Currently input
Item
source
SOURCE RECEIVER You can view the current status (input or DSP program currently AV 1-7
AV selected) on the front panel display or TV. VIDEO AUX DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
1 2 3 4
AUDIO 1-4*1 (decoder name*2)
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
PHONO
1 2 3 4
Switching information on the front display (AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models)
TUNER
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
1 Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various TUNER (FM/AM) (decoder name*2)
SCENE
display items. * (U.K., Europe and Russia models)
1 2 3 4 Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station
Info VOL. (p.94).
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
Audio Decoder L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
TUNER (DAB)
See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.90) for details.
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Item name
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
ON
SCREEN OPTION
About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding Bluetooth
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
USB
ENTER information appears. Decoder (decoder name*2)
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

RETURN DISPLAY
AV1 VOL.
SERVER
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address),
BAND
MODE
TUNING PRESET
†‡ Dsur L C R
SL SW1
SBL SBR
SR
AirPlay Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi

MOVIE MUSIC
Information MAC address)
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station
INFO
X
INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4 name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

5 6 7 8
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can NET RADIO Decoder (decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address),
9 0
MEMORY
10 ENT
also be applied separately to each input source group. Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi
TV MAC address)
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
MusicCast Link (decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address), Ethernet MAC
(Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
*1 AUDIO 4: RX-A3070 only
*2
The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no
audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
En 122
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
SOURCE
2
AV
RECEIVER
3 4
1 Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
5 6 7 V-AUX
AUDIO
Compressed Music
1 2 3 4
Input source/ Enhancer/Hi-Res Volume/YPAO
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET Party mode status mode status Volume status
TUNER

ZONE
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
ON
SCREEN OPTION
ENTER Audio format/ CINEMA DSP status Sound mode

Decoder
RETURN DISPLAY
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
BAND
PRESET
2 To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
En 123
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is Option menu items
available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings
during playback.
X
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
1 Press OPTION.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
Front display • Default settings are underlined.
Option VOL.
Item Function Page
Tone Control L C R
SL SW1 SW
SBL SBR
SR
Tone Control Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and
125
(Tone Control) low-frequency range individually.
TV screen
YPAO Volume
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 125
(YPAO Vol.)
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
Adaptive DRC
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is 125
(A.DRC)
adjusted.
Dialogue Level
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 126
(Dialog Lvl)
DTS Dialogue
Dialogue Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X
Control 126
(Dialog) contents.
(DTS Dialog)
2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Dialogue Lift
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 126
(Dialog Lift)
X Lipsync Adjustment
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. 126
(Lipsync Adj.)

Subwoofer/Bass
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 126
(Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass

4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. (Extra Bass)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. 126
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 127
Enhancer (Enhancer)
(Enhancer) Hi-Res Mode Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
127
(HiRes Mode) enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio).
Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing settings

127
(V.M) configured in the “Setup” menu.
Video Processing
(Video Process.) Video
Adjustment Selects a video adjustment setting from presets. 127
(Video Adjust)
En 124
Item Function Page ■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Input Trim Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
Corrects volume differences between input sources. 128
(In.Trim)
Input Settings Audio Select Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one
128
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
(Input Settings) (A.Sel) audio connection is made for one input source.
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency
Video Out
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 128 levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
(V.Out)
FM Mode Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
128
(FM Mode) reception. Settings
Init Scan (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
88 Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume.
(Init Scan) Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.
On (On) Enables YPAO Volume.
Tune AID (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
91
(Tune AID) Checks reception strength of each DAB channel label.
X
Shuffle Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage device • YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.54).
-
(Shuffle) (p.102) or media server (p.106).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at
Repeat Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage device night.
-
(Repeat) (p.102) or media server (p.106).
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) individually. the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low
Choices volume at night.
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) Settings
Setting range
Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments
On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled.
Y
• When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. volume.
X Volume: low Volume: high

You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE CONTROL
Output level
Output level
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment. On
On
Off Off
Input level Input level
En 125
■ Dialogue (Dialog) ■ Lipsync Adjustment (Lipsync Adj.)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can
turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
X
This setting is available only when “Delay Enable” (p.147) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Enable” (default).
Setting range
0 to 3
■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)
X Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.
This setting is not available when DTS:X content is played back, or when the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder
is working.
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
DTS Dialogue Control (DTS Dialog) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X contents. Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Setting range
0 to 6
Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
X Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass
This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played back.
sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the
subwoofer.
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Settings
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from
below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass.
X On (On) Enables Extra Bass.

This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are
used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.79) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Ideal position
En 126
■ Enhancer (Enhancer) ■ Video Processing (Video Process.)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode. Configures the video signal processing settings.
Enhancer (Enhancer) Video Mode (V.M)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.83). Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments)
settings configured in “Processing” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu.
X
• This setting is applied separately to each input source. Settings
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.83). Direct (Direct) Disables the video signal processing.
Settings Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
(Processing)
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)
Default
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment” (p.147)
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
in the “Setup” menu.
Others: Off (Off)
Y X
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz Settings
– DSD audio 1 to 6
Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is
set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel
PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings
Enables the high-resolution mode.

On (On) (The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal
processing condition.)
Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode.
En 127
■ Input Settings (Input Settings) ■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
Configures the input settings. Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
X Settings
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences
when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
Audio Select (A.Sel)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input
source.
Settings
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
Auto (Auto)
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input
HDMI (HDMI)
through the HDMI jack.
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when
Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt)
no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack.
Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are
Analog (Analog)
input through the AUDIO jacks.
Video Out (V.Out)

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
Off (Off) Does not output video.
AV 1-7 (AV1-7), VIDEO

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
AUX (V-AUX)
En 128
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1 Press ON SCREEN.
2 Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
The input source of the unit also changes.
X
You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
En 129
Input menu items 4 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
X
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.
Item Function Page
Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 130
Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 131
Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 131
X
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
DMC Control 131
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
(RX-A3070 only) 5 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
Balance Input Attenuator Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input to
avoid sound distortion.
131
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
(RX-A3070 only)
Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode 131
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
X
Some network input sources (such as “AirPlay”) cannot be renamed or have the icons changed.
■ Setup procedure
1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Auto” or “Manual” and press the cursor key (w).
If you select “Auto”, the unit creates a name automatically according to the connected device. In
this case, skip Steps 3 and 4.
X
This step is available only when “AV1-7”, “VIDEO AUX” or “AUDIO1-3” (available only when any audio digital
input jack is assigned) is selected.
2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
3 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
En 130
■ Decoder Mode ■ Balance Input Attenuator
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. (RX-A3070 only)
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you can
“DTS”. avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input.
Input sources Activate the attenuator when connecting an audio device which outputs signals of 3 V (RMS) or
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned) higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.46).
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3070 only
Input source
Settings AUDIO 4
Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. Settings
DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) Bypass Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input.
ATT.(-6dB) Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal level (-6dB).
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. ■ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode
Input sources (RX-A3070 only)
AirPlay Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.
Settings Input source
Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned), (network
sources), Bluetooth, USB
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20
Limited
dB and mute). Settings
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB Off Disables the jitter elimination function.
Full
and mute).
Enables the jitter elimination function.
The higher level enhances the DAC accuracy, but may cause audio interruptions
Level 1, Level 2, Level 3
■ DMC Control on some playback devices depending on the audio clock conditions. In this case,
select lower level.
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable Allows DMCs to control playback.
X
A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When
this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on
the same network.
En 131
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
5 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.76) using the TV screen.
1 Press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
2 Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
Item Function Page
Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 132
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also
configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be
Load 133
included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently
assigned to the selected scene.
Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 134
Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 134
3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the
cursor key (q). ■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected
scene.
X
If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the
corresponding SCENE key (p.77).
En 132
■ Load Check or uncheck
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.

Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments.
Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via
HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Choices
Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.
Input (p.75), Station*1, Listening*1, Music Content*2, Playback*2, Audio Select
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI (p.128)
HDMI Control Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via Input *1 Only when “TUNER” is selected
HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control.
*2
Only when “Bluetooth”, “USB” or “NET” is selected
Default HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.75)
SCENE1-2: HDMI Control
DSP Program (p.78), Pure Direct Mode (p.148), Enhancer (p.83), Enhancer Hi-Res
SCENE3-12: Off Mode
Mode (p.127)
Y Sound
Tone Control (p.125), YPAO Volume (p.125), Adaptive DRC (p.125), Extra Bass
To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI (p.126)
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.190). CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.148), Dialogue Lift (p.126), Dialogue Level (p.126),
Surround
Subwoofer Trim (p.126)
Detail Video Video Mode (p.149), Video Adjustment (p.127)
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently Volume Master Volume (p.75)
assigned to the selected scene. Lipsync Lipsync (p.147), Delay (p.147)
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.142), PEQ Select (p.146)
ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
Default
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 and include “Volume” in
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
the assignments for SCENE4.
X
The scene assignments can include radio stations, or the content on a selected USB storage device and a network
device.
En 133
Playing a radio station or content included as the scene assignments automatically when ■ Rename/Icon Select
pressing SCENE
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Y ■ Setup procedure
Individual contents cannot be registered for “Bluetooth” and “AirPlay”. The content lastly played back on each
device will be recalled.
1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
1 In the “Detail” screen, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Input” and press the cursor key
(r).
2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to set “Listening” or “Playback” to “On”.

When “TUNER” is selected, “Listening” is available.
When “Bluetooth”, “USB” or “NET” is selected, “Playback” is available.
3 If “Input” is unchecked, press ENTER to check the box.

3 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
X
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.76) for the selected scene.
En 134
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu)
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV
screen.
1 Press ON SCREEN.
2 Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
X
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
X
You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
En 135
DSP Program menu items Item Function Settings
1.0 s to 5.0 s
X Reverb Time
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
Higher to enrich the reverberant
• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. sound and lower to have clear
sound.
• Default settings are underlined.
0 ms to 250 ms
Adjusts the delay between the direct
Reverb Delay
sound and reverberant sound generation. Higher to enhance the delay
■ Settings for sound programs effect, and lower to reduce it.
0% to 100%
Item Function Settings
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant Higher to strengthen the
Auto, bDsur*, Neural:X, Neo:6 Reverb Level
sound. reverberant sound, and lower to
Selects a surround decoder to be used in Cinema, Neo:6 Music* weaken it.
Decode Type combination with the selected sound (* Available only when
program. “SURROUND DECODER” is The following items are available when you select “9ch Stereo”.
selected)
Item Function Settings
-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
Higher to enhance the sound Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5
DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.
field effect, and lower to reduce -5 to 0 to +5
it. Adjusts the front and rear volume
Front / Rear Balance Higher to enhance the front side, and
balance.
Adjusts the delay between the direct 1 ms to 99 ms lower to enhance the rear side.
Initial Delay sound and presence sound field Higher to enhance the delay -5 to 0 to +5
generation. effect, and lower to reduce it. Adjusts the left and right volume
Left / Right Balance Higher to enhance the right side, and
balance.
Adjusts the delay between the direct lower to enhance the left side.
Surround Initial Delay sound and surround sound field
1 ms to 49 ms 0 to 5 to 10
generation.
Higher to enhance the delay Higher to enhance the upside, and
Adjusts the delay between the direct effect, and lower to reduce it. Adjust the height volume balance lower to enhance the downside. (The
Surround Back Initial Height Balance
sound and surround back sound field using the presence speakers. presence speakers do not produce
Delay
generation. sounds when “Height Balance” is set
Adjusts the broadening effect of the to “0”.)
Room Size
presence sound field. Enables/disables monaural sound
0.1 to 2.0 Monaural Mix Off, On
Adjusts the broadening effect of the output.
Higher to enhance the
Surround Room Size
surround sound field. broadening effect, and lower to
Surround Back Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the
reduce it. X
surround back sound field. Available items in “9ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound

Liveness
field.
0 to 10
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound Higher to enhance the
Surround Liveness
field. reflectivity, and lower to reduce
it.
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
Surround Back Liveness
sound field.
En 136
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to
“bDsur” or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type Item Function Settings
Selects whether to spread Off, On

the center channel signals Select “On” to spread center channel
bDsur Center Spread to left and right when signals to left and right if you feel the
2-channel source is center sound is too strong when
played. 2-channel source is played.
0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0

Adjusts the center
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level
Neo:6 Music Center Image orientation level (less broadening
(broadening effect) of the
front sound field. effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
En 137
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1 Press ON SCREEN.
X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
En 138
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 54
Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 142
Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 142
Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 142
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 143
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 143
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 143
Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 144
Speaker Configuration Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. 144
Manual Setup
Rear Presence Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size. 144
Subwoofer 1
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase. 144
Subwoofer 2
Layout Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers. 145
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 145
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 146
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 146
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 146
En 139
Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 147
Lipsync Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 147
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 147
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 147
Max Volume Sets the limit value of the volumes. 148
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 148
Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 148
Sound
Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 148
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3. 148
Virtual Presence Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. 148
Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 148
DAC Digital Filter

Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter). 149
(RX-A3070 only)
Object Decode Mode Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos or DTS:X contents. 149
Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments). 149
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 151
HDMI Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 152
Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 152
Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 152
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 152
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 153
Network MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 153
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 154
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit) also turns on the power of
MusicCast Link Power Interlock 154
other devices of the network.
Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. 154
Disconnect Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 97
Audio Receive
Bluetooth Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). 154
Transmitter Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. 155

Audio Send
Device Search Searches available Bluetooth devices (speakers/headphones) when the unit is used as a Bluetooth audio transmitter. 98
En 140
Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 155
Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 156
Max Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 limit value of the volume. 156
Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 156
Audio Delay Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3. 156
Zone2 Set Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 156
Zone3 Set Enhancer Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 156
Multi Zone
Tone Control Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 156
Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 157
Balance Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 157
Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 157
Zone4 Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 157
HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 157
Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone. 157
Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 158
Remote PROGRAM Key Assigns the desired function to the PROGRAM keys of the remote control. 158
Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 158
Display Set Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 158
Function
Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 159
Trigger Output1 Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 159
Trigger Output2 Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 159
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 160
Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 160
ECO
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 161
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 161
En 141
Speaker (Manual Setup) ■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Configures the speaker settings manually.
Choices
X Pattern1 ▶ 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Default settings are underlined.
Pattern2 ▶ 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
■ Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers
(with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply
bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance your system.
■ Setting Pattern Settings
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 9-channel
Basic
plus rear presence speakers) (p.21).
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the
selected pattern. Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2
7.2 +1Zone system in the main zone (p.32).
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default: Zone2).
• Power Amp Assign
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2.2
• Configuration 7.2.2 +1Zone system in the main zone (p.32).
• Distance
Select this option when you use Zone2 and Zone3 speakers in addition to the 7.2
• Level
system in the main zone (p.32).
• Parametric EQ 7.2 +2Zone
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 and EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone2 for EXTRA SP 1, Zone3 for EXTRA SP 2).
Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2 (RX-A3070 only)
7.2.4 [ext.RP] Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including rear presence channel
X expansion using an external amplifier (p.33).
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.
(RX-A3070 only)
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your 7.2.4 [ext.Front] Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including front channel
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you expansion using an external amplifier (p.34).
can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
(RX-A3070 only)
7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP] Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including front presence and
rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.34).
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2.2
7.2.2 [ext.Front] system (including front channel expansion using an external amplifier) in the
+1Zone main zone (p.35).
En 142
Select this option when you use Zone2 and Zone3 speakers in addition to the 7.2 Center
system (including front channel expansion using an external amplifier) in the
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
7.2 [ext.Front] +2Zone main zone (p.35).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 and EXTRA SP 2 jacks Settings
(default: Zone2 for EXTRA SP 1, Zone3 for EXTRA SP 2).
Select this option for large speakers.
Select this option when you use the 7.2 system including bi-amp front speakers Large
7.2 Bi-Amp The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components.
(p.36).
Select this option when you use the 5.2.2 system including bi-amp front speakers Select this option for small speakers.
5.2.2 Bi-Amp Small
(p.36). The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2
7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone system (including bi-amp front speakers) in the main zone (p.37). Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
None
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2). The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
(RX-A3070 only)
7.2.4 Bi-Amp Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including bi-amp front speakers, Surround
[ext.FP+RP] and front presence and rear presence channel expansion using an external
amplifier) (p.37). Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
(RX-A3070 only) Settings

5.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.RP] Select this option when you use the 5.2.4 system including bi-amp front speakers
and rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier) (p.38).
Large The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency
components.
■ Configuration Select this option for small speakers.
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. Small The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
X Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or
None The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP
larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”) as a guide.
works when you select a sound program.
• When the speaker size is set to “Small”, you can configure the “Crossover” setting after pressing ENTER.
Frequency sounds lower than the specified value will be output from the subwoofer and higher will be output
from the corresponding speakers.
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings

Large
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components.
Select this option for small speakers.

Small The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than
the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
X
“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
En 143
Surround Back Rear Presence
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.
Settings Settings
Select this option when one large speaker is connected. Large Select this option for large speakers.
Large x1 The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel Small Select this option for small speakers.
frequency components.
None Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
Large x2 The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components. X
This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Small x1
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz). Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack
Select this option when two small speakers are connected. and its phase.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
Small x2 Settings
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz). Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
None Normal
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
channels.
Use
X Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”. Reverse
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.
Front Presence
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
None
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels when both
Settings “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
Large Select this option for large speakers.

X
Small Select this option for small speakers. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
En 144
Layout Rear Presence
Selects a rear presence layout when rear presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates
Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers.
the optimization of the sound field effect.
Surround
Settings
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Rear Height Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the rear side wall.
Settings
Overhead Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the rear presence
Rear Dolby Enabled SP
room. speakers.
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the
Front
room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.81) works in this case. X
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround/Front Presence/Rear Presence)” is set to “None”.
X • To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).
This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.
Subwoofer
Front Presence
Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.
Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates
Settings
the optimization of the sound field effect.
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right sides of the
Settings Left + Right
room.
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear sides of the
Front Height Front + Rear
wall. room.
Overhead Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling. Monaural x2 Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence
Dolby Enabled SP
speakers. X
This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.
X
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
■ Distance
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from
“Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
En 145
■ Level 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for
Adjusts the volume of each speaker. subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Setting range
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Setting range
Settings Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. 5 To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. an item.
YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
YPAO:Front
speakers. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Through Does not use the equalizer. Setting range

Center frequency: 15.6 Hz to 16.0 kHz (15.6 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
X Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.54). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Manual equalizer adjustment

■ Test Tone
1 Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
2 Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
Settings
3 Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
Off Does not output test tones.
X On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. equalizer.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.54) to the “Manual” fields for fine
adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
En 146
Sound Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set
Configures the audio output settings.
to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to
“Auto”.
■ Lipsync Setting range

Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output. 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Delay Enable X
• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. fine adjustment.
• This setting is also available in “Lipsync Adjustment” (p.126) in the “Option” menu.
Choices
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-4*
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3070 only ■ Dynamic Range
Settings Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS
Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
signals) playback.
Enable Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Settings
Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Auto/Manual Select Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.
Minimum/Auto When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically
Setting range
adjusted based on the input signal information.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that
Auto supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio
Manual output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Y
Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
En 147
■ Max Volume ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Sets the limit value of the volume. Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.79). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD3
functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo).
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Settings
Off Disables CINEMA DSP HD3.

■ Initial Volume On Enables CINEMA DSP HD3.
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
■ Virtual Presence Speaker
Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are
On increments).
connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
presence speakers (p.79).
Settings
■ Pure Direct Mode
Off Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.83).
On Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
Settings
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected X
Auto input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “Virtual
selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed. Presence Speaker” to “Off”.
Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker
■ Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected.
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
Settings
Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results
On
and the volume level.
X
VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.
En 148
■ DAC Digital Filter Video
(RX-A3070 only)
Configures the video output settings.
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite
sounds.
Settings
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation characteristics.

Sharp Roll-off Type
It has a tendency to produce clear sounds.
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation characteristics.

Slow Roll-off Type
It has a tendency to produce soft sounds.
Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter.
Short Latency Type
It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds.
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).
■ Object Decode Mode
Settings
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos or DTS:X
contents. Direct Disables the video signal processing.
Settings Enables the video signal processing.

Processing
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.
Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be played in
Disable
normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.
X
Enable Enables playback of object-based audio signals. When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce
video output delay.
X
If audio output is not available when Dolby Atmos or DTS:X signals are input, set “Object Decode Mode” to Resolution
“Enable”.
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Settings
Through Does not convert the resolution.
Auto Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p, Output video signals with a selected resolution.

1080i, 1080p, 4K (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
X
If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.165) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV
normally.)
En 149
Aspect Detail Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Setting range
Settings
0 to 50
Through Does not convert the aspect ratio.
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the Edge Enhancement
16:9 Normal
screen. Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.
X Setting range
0 to 50
This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p
(4K) signals.
Brightness
Adjustment Adjusts the video brightness.
Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can register Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100
the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).
X Contrast
The video adjustments work on the video signals with 1080p or lower resolution. Adjusts the video contrast.
■ Setup procedure Setting range

-100 to 0 to +100
1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.
Saturation
2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Adjusts the video saturation.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100
3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
En 150
HDMI ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.192) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Configures the HDMI settings.
Settings
Off Disables ARC.
On Enables ARC.
Y
You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the
unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use
the TV’s speakers.
Standby Sync
■ HDMI Control
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.190).
“HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Settings
Off Disables HDMI Control.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Enables HDMI Control.
On On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is
Auto
Y receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.190) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set
to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is
switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1-3
Default
AUDIO 1
Y
When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an
external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
En 151
■ Audio Output Network
Selects a device to output audio.
Configures the network settings.
X
• The “HDMI OUT1” setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) is set to “Main”.
HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT
2 jack.
Settings
Off Disables the audio output from the TV.

■ Network Connection
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Selects the network connection method.
Y Settings
The HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
Wired
commercially-available network cable (p.50).
■ Standby Through Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless
Wireless (Wi-Fi) router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in
wireless network” (p.67).
standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (AV
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
1-7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby Wireless Direct For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
indicator on the unit blinks). (Wireless Direct)” (p.72).
Settings
(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.) ■ IP Address
Off
Does not output videos/audio to the TV. Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
On
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) DHCP
Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the
Auto Select whether to use a DHCP server.
power saving mode.
Settings
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For
Off
details, see “Manual network settings”.
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such
On
as IP address).
En 152
■ Manual network settings ■ MAC Address Filter
1 Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. Filter
IP Address Specifies an IP address. Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Settings
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
Off Disables the MAC address filter.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1-10”, specify the MAC addresses
On
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit.
3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a X
AirPlay (p.110) and DMC (p.131) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
value.
4 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. MAC Address 1-10

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to
5 To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
6 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
■ Procedure
1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1-5” or “MAC Address 6-10” and press
ENTER.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
Settings 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
value.
Off Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function. 4 To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Enables the network standby function.

5 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
Auto (If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving
mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power consumption of not
more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.
En 153
■ Network Name Bluetooth
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
Configures the Bluetooth settings.
■ Setup procedure
■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.97).
Settings
X Off Disables the Bluetooth function.
On Enables the Bluetooth function.
X ■ Audio Receive
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio receiver.
Bluetooth Standby
■ MusicCast Link Power Interlock Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit) (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a
also turns on the power of other devices of the network. connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Settings
Settings
Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
Off Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
On Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master). On
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
X
This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.153) is set to “Off”.
En 154
■ Audio Send Multi Zone
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio transmitter.
Configures the multi zone settings.
Transmitter
Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
When this function is enabled, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth
speakers/headphones (p.98).
Settings
Off Disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
On Enables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
■ Main Zone Set

Configures the main zone setting.
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
X
X
En 155
■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set Audio Delay
Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings. Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3 so that the audio is synchronized with the
video.
Volume
Setting range
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the volume
adjustment for the corresponding zone.
Mono
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Settings
Settings
Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Variable Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

X
This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.142).
Enhancer
Max Volume Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.83) for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 limit value of the volumes. Settings
Setting range Off Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB On Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
X
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. Tone Control
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) for Zone2 or
Initial Volume
Zone3 output.
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
Settings
Adjusts the levels of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range
Off Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. Auto (Bass) automatically in synchronization with the main volume, with correction for
the auditory response of the human ear.
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
On Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.) Manual
manually (-6.0 to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
X Bypass
Does not adjust the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. range (Bass).
En 156
Extra Bass ■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 or Zone3 output. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of speakers. Settings
Settings Main, Zone2, Zone4
Off Disables Extra Bass. X

For details on audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.190).
On Enables Extra Bass.
Zone2 - Audio Output

Balance
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” is set
Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 or Zone3 output. to “Zone2”.
Setting range
-20 to 0 to +20 (negative to the left and positive to the right) On Enables the audio output.
Off Disables the audio output (video output only).

Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Party Mode Set
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set”
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.117) for each zone.
(p.155).
Choice
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4
■ Zone4 Set Settings
Configures the Zone4 settings.
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Zone Rename Enable

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by
pressing PARTY on the remote control.
Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set”
(p.155).
En 157
Function ■ Remote PROGRAM Key
Assigns the desired function to the PROGRAM keys of the remote control.
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
For example, when “INPUT Selection” is selected, the PROGRAM keys will operate as the input
switching keys.
Settings
DSP Program
Select a sound program.
Selection
INPUT Selection Select an input source for playback.
NET Selection Select a network source.
Preset Selection Select a registered item (shortcut).
■ Input Assignment Browse Screen -

Move to the previous/next page of the browse screen list.
1 Page Up/Down
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
Subwoofer Trim Adjust the subwoofer volume.
■ Procedure Dialogue Level Adjust the volume of dialogue sounds.

Example: assigning the OPTICAL (2) jack to the input source “AV 2” qRepeat / wShuffle Select the repeat/shuffle setting for the USB storage device or media server.
1 Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
2 Use the cursor keys to select “2” and press ENTER. Y

The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.161) is set to “On”.
Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
On Displays short messages on the TV screen.
3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
X
You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
En 158
Wallpaper Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device
Settings
connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Piano Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Choices
Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High Transmits the electronic signal.

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input Target Zone
switching.
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Trigger Mode Settings
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
Main
Settings When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone
Power
specified with “Target Zone”. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone Zone2
specified with “Target Zone”. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
Source
synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.”
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission
Manual synchronized with power status of Zone3.
with “Manual”. Zone3
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone3.
Source
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when synchronized with power status of Zone4.
Zone4
“Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone4.
Choices
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-4*, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of any zone.
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3070 only All
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
Settings synchronized with the input switching in any zone.
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source
Low
specified in this option.
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in
High
this option.
En 159
■ Memory Guard ECO
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Configures the power supply settings.
Settings
Off Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
X
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Icon
■ Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no
input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby
mode.
Settings
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input
20 Minutes
signals are detected for 20 minutes.
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the
2 Hours, 4 Hours,
specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to
8 Hours, 12 Hours
standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Default
U.K., Europe and Russia models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off
X
Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front
display.
En 160
■ ECO Mode Viewing information about the unit
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. (Information menu)
You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting “ECO Mode” to “On”. After setting, be
sure to press ENTER to restart the unit. You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
Settings
X
Off Disables the eco mode. If new firmware is available, (mail icon) appears at the upper right of the “Information”. For details, see
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.171).
On Enables the eco mode.
Y 1 Press ON SCREEN.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
Settings
English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian, Chinese
X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
En 161
Types of information ■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
You can check the following information in the Information menu.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
■ Audio Signal Interface TV interface
Displays information about the current audio signal. Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV
Format Audio format of the input signal
The number of source channels in the input signal

■ Network
(front/surround/LFE) Displays the network information on the unit.
Channel
Input For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels,
2 surround channels, and LFE). (When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
IP Address IP address
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
The number of signal output channels (for example, “5.1.2”
denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
Output Channel
channels”) and the speaker terminals from which signals are
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
output
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
X MAC Address (Ethernet)

MAC address
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
specifications and settings of the playback device.
Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.154)
• Some information may not be available depending on the signal type.
MusicCast Network The status of the MusicCast network connection
■ Video Signal Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection
Displays information about the current video signal. (When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
SSID
The SSID of the wireless network
HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog)
En 162
(When using Wireless Direct) Configuring the system settings
SSID The SSID of the wireless network (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Security Security method
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
Security Key Security key
IP Address
Subnet Mask
IP address
Subnet mask
1 Set the unit to standby mode.
MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MusicCast Network The status of the MusicCast network connection MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
PROGRAM
Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.165)
TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.165)
Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.164)

3 Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Tuner Freq. Step

The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.165)
4 Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
System ID System ID number

5 Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit
The new settings take effect.
X
If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, (mail icon) appears at the upper right of the
“Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can
update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s
firmware via the network” (p.171).
■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
Input The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Volume The volume for Zone2 or Zone3
En 163
ADVANCED SETUP menu items Changing the speaker impedance setting
(SPEAKER IMP.)
X
Default settings are underlined.
SPEAKER IMP.
Item Function Page
8¬MIN
SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 164
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers
REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 164 connected.
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 165
Settings
TUNER FRQ STEP 165 Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 6 Ω MIN
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 165
8 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.
MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 165
4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format. 166
DTS MODE Switches the DTS format notification setting. 166

Turning on/off the remote control sensor
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from (REMOTE SENSOR)
RECOV./BACKUP 166
the backup.
INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 167

REMOTE SENSER
FIRM. UPDATE Updates the firmware. 167
ON
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 167 Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is
turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings
ON Turns on the remote control sensor.
OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.
En 164
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
REMOTE ID TV FORMAT
ID1 NTSC
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique
Settings
remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. NTSC, PAL
Settings Default
ID1, ID2 U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Brazil and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1 To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 together for 3 seconds.
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 together for 3 seconds.
(MONITOR CHECK)
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
MONITOR CHECK
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
YES
(Brazil, Asia and General models only) The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.149)
TUNER FRQ STEP when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different
FM50/AM9 resolution than the detected resolution.
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. Settings
Settings Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution
YES
supported by the TV only.)
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by
FM100/AM10
10-kHz steps. Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified
SKIP
resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by
FM50/AM9
9-kHz steps.
Y
Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after
“MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
En 165
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS
MODE)
4K MODE
MODE 1 DTS MODE
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and MODE 1
playback device are connected to the unit.
Switches the DTS format notification setting.
Settings This setting informs the video device (such as BD/DVD player) about the DTS formats that the
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below. unit supports.
MODE 1 Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed Settings
correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.
MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below. MODE 1
Use this setting under normal circumstances.
Format Use this setting if the video device (such as BD/DVD player) fails to properly
MODE 2
output a DTS signal even when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.
MODE 1 MODE 2
8 bit 10 bit 12 bit 8 bit 10 bit 12 bit
RGB 4:4:4 , - - Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)

YCbCr 4:4:4 , - -
4K/60, 50 Hz
, -
YCbCr 4:2:2
RECOV./BACKUP
YCbCr 4:2:0 , , - BACKUP
RGB 4:4:4 , , - Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
4K/30, 25, 24 Hz YCbCr 4:4:4 , , -
■ Backup/recovery procedure
YCbCr 4:2:2 , ,
1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the
Y process.
• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with
Ethernet. Choices
• Regardless of the setting, 4K signals are input as “MODE 2” for the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack. BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
RECOVERY
backup has been created).
Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
En 166
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
INITIALIZE VERSION
CANCEL x.xx
Restores the default settings for the unit. Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
Choices
X
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.163) in the “Information” menu.
VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)
FIRM. UPDATE
USB
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as
needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information
supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the
information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware
update.
Choices
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
X
If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.171).
En 167
Controlling external devices with the remote control
SOURCE
SOURCE RECEIVER You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices (such
1 2
AV
3 4
as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control code of the 2 Press CODE SET.
external device. SOURCE blinks twice.
5 6 7 V-AUX
Y Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise,

AUDIO
1 2 3 4
PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET • You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor. the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2.
TUNER
• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other ID
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly. 3 Press TV z.
SCENE
• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the
1 2 3 4
registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register the
codes again.
4 Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control
code.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
X Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE blinks

Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all the
twice.
ON input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI Control-compatible
SCREEN OPTION
devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This function may not work If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
ENTER depending on the specification of the external device.)
RETURN DISPLAY ■ TV operations

MODE
TUNING
BAND
PRESET
Registering the remote control code for a Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you can
control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input source
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT TV
MOVIE MUSIC

selected on the unit.
INFO SLEEP
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
1 2 3 4
INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.
registered its remote control code.
MEMORY MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.
9 0 ENT
X
10
TV
INPUT TV operation keys TV operation keys TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.
TV VOL TV CH
TV z You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection keys
MUTE CODE SET
(p.169). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the TV TV CH Switch the channels of the TV.
CODE SET
(this function may not be available on some TV models). TV z Turns on/off the TV.
1 See “List of remote control codes” (p.198) to find your

TV’s remote control code.
X
If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.
En 168
Registering the remote control codes for ■ Playback device operations
playback devices Once you have registered the remote control code for your playback
SOURCE RECEIVER
device, you can control it using the following keys after selecting the
SOURCE z
1 2
AV
3 4
SOURCE You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if you input source or scene.
RECEIVER
have registered their remote control codes. You can also use the input
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4 Input selection keys selection keys to change the playback devices that are controlled by the X
By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or external
remote control, because their remote control codes are assigned to the device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric keys. You
TUNER
input selection keys. can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in orange), and an external
MAIN 2 3 4 PARTY HDMI OUT device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For example, if you register the
1
ZONE
SCENE See “List of remote control codes” (p.198) to find the remote control code of your external device on TUNER, you can operate the unit’s
1 2 3 4 built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER and the external device after pressing
remote control code for your playback device. SOURCE.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

X SOURCE z Turns on/off the playback device.
If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes. Cursor keys Select an item.
TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU External device
operation keys Menu operation
ON
SCREEN OPTION ENTER Confirms a selected item.
keys
2 Press CODE SET. RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
SOURCE blinks twice. DISPLAY Switches information on the display.
RETURN DISPLAY
DISPLAY
BAND
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, TOP MENU Displays the top menu.
MODE
TUNING PRESET External device the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.
operation keys
s Stops playback.
3
MOVIE MUSIC
INFO SLEEP
Press the input selection key.
d Stops playback temporarily.
1 2 3 4
For example, press AV 1 to set the remote control code for the
Numeric keys External device Starts playback of the selected
a
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
playback device connected to the AV 1 jack. operation keys song/video.
9 0 10 ENT
TV
TV operation keys h
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET
4 Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control
j
Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).
CODE SET code.
f
Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks Skips forward/backward.
g
twice.
Numeric keys Enter numerical values.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
TV operation keys Control the TV (p.168).
X
For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to Y
“Registering a scene” (p.77). These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback device
and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
En 169
Resetting remote control codes
SOURCE RECEIVER
You can reset a remote control code registered to each input selection
SOURCE
AV
key.
RECEIVER
1 2 3 4
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX

1 Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
TUNER
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise,
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1.
SCENE
1 2 3 4
2 Press the input selection key.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
3 Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.

TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
ON
SCREEN OPTION
If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.
ENTER
To reset the remote control to factory default settings

RETURN DISPLAY
a Press CODE SET.
BAND
MODE b Press RECEIVER.
TUNING PRESET
c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
CODE SET
En 170
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
SOURCE RECEIVER New firmware that provides additional features or product Updating the unit’s firmware immediately
AV improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the
1 2 3 4
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it.
5
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4
1 Read the on-screen description.
Note
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH USB NET
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable
during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
2 To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT
(depending on your Internet connection speed). “START” and press ENTER.
SCENE • If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
1 2 3 4
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.167).
3 If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel.
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
The firmware update is complete.
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
X X
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED If you want to cancel without doing anything now, select “CLOSE”. (mail icon)
SETUP” menu (p.167). appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will
ENTER Cursor keys
ENTER • The firmware update indicator (p.15) on the front display lights up when a firmware be displayed in the “System” screen (p.163). You can update the unit’s firmware by
RETURN DISPLAY
update is available via the network. pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
BAND
MODE
TUNING PRESET
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after Information icon
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ON SCREEN is pressed.
MOVIE MUSIC

INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH
MUTE CODE SET
Message
System Icon
En 171
Updating the unit’s firmware at power off
1
SOURCE
2
AV
RECEIVER
3 4
z 1 Read the on-screen description.
1
6
2
AUDIO
7
3
V-AUX
4
2 To set the firmware to update at power off, use the cursor
keys to select “LATER” and press ENTER.
TUNER
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
PARTY HDMI OUT 3 Press z (receiver power) to turn off the unit.
SCENE The following message is displayed on the front display.
1 2 3 4
Firmware update indicator (flashes)
PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME

NETWORK
UPDATE:ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
X
The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update 2
ENTER Cursor keys
minutes after Step 3.
ENTER
MODE
TUNING
BAND
PRESET
4 To start the firmware update, press ENTER.
MOVIE MUSIC
X
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • To cancel the firmware update and turn off the unit, press RETURN.
INFO SLEEP
1 2 3 4 • You can also start the firmware update by pressing INFO on the front panel.
5 6 7 8
• The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the
MEMORY
9 0 10 ENT unit with AV CONTROLLER or MusicCast CONTROLLER.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL TV CH If the firmware update is complete, the unit turns off automatically.
MUTE CODE SET
En 172
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on
how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction
balance...
manuals for each device.
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the
speaker settings again (p.54). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.142).
operations...
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are
volume control...
watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.158) in the “Setup” menu to turn off
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
the short messages.
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We
recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
unit in advance (p.148). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.156).
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing
“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.160).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit... The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. Yamaha product as well as the unit...
If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha
applied when the receiver is turned on (p.148). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 or
product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different
Zone3 (p.156).
remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.165).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
between input sources… even when the unit is in standby mode...
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio
“Option” menu (p.128).
played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this
function, set “Standby Through” (p.152) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled.
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.190). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable
HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required
En 173
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
First, check the following:
1 The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely.
2 The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
3 The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest
The power does not turn on. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks
Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
if you try to turn on the power.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit.
The power does not turn off. (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it
supply voltage. again.)
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
(p.29).
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used for To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to
the specified time. “Off” (p.160).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.164).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit.
(p.29).
The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
unit is too high. (p.161).
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
The unit is not reacting. (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
supply voltage. outlet and plug it again.)
En 174
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.6).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote lighting.
control. The remote control is set to control external devices. Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.165).
identical.
The remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off. Set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.164).
Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights up in
The remote control is set to control the unit.
External devices cannot be controlled using the green).
remote control. Set the remote control code again (p.168). Even if the remote control code is registered
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.
properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.
En 175
Audio
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format
No sound. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.162).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.148).
The volume cannot be increased.
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.162).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.146).
speaker.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.54) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
speaker settings (p.143).
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.54) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
volume (p.146).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
The speaker is malfunctioning.
malfunctioning.
To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals.
(p.146).
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.54) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup” menu
No sound is coming from the subwoofer. Subwoofer output is disabled.
to “Use” (p.144).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
No sound from the playback device (connected to the Protection).
unit with HDMI). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
limit.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the playback device audio is output
No sound from the playback device (when HDMI The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
from the speakers connected to the unit.
Control is used).
TV audio is selected as the input source. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
En 176
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.41).
HDMI cable.
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.151).
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
(If you are trying to use ARC)

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.151). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the unit

The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is disabled. Set “Zone2 - Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.157).
with HDMI).
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.162). If necessary, change
Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only.
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
The volume of the unit is too high.
The sound is distorted. (p.161).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4, HDMI
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
The sound is interrupted. audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to
(p.114).
internal circuitry switching.
En 177
Video
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
No video.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.165).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal”
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. in the “Information” menu (p.162). For information about video signals supported by the
unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.192).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
No video from the playback device (connected to the The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV
unit with HDMI). Protection).
and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.
The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the VIDEO To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the playback
AUX (HDMI IN) jack. device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.44).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone) Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected. (p.75).
The video is interrupted. (If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4)
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due (p.114).
to internal circuitry switching.
En 178
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. (p.128).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
other electrical equipment. antenna.
Select the station manually (p.85).

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Select the station manually (p.85).
The AM radio signal is weak.
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the
supplied AM antenna.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations. Register AM radio stations manually
AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used.
(p.85).
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
No DAB radio reception. An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.88).
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.91), and adjust the
Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.
No DAB radio reception even after performing an antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
initial scan. Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of
There is no DAB coverage in your area.
the DAB coverage in your area.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.91), and adjust the
There is multi-path interference.
DAB radio reception is weak or noisy. antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may
DAB information is not available or is inaccurate. Contact the DAB broadcaster.
not provide information.
No DAB radio sound. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station.
En 179
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.154).
Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit. Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.97).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
Move the unit away from those devices.
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
working for some reason. connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.97).
The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.
Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.
(p.97).
during playback.
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that

Move the unit away from those devices.
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
En 180
USB and network
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
continuously.
playback folder.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to
“On” on the unit (p.152). If you want to configure the network parameters manually,
The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly.
check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your
network (p.152).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
router (access point).
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no
point). obstacles between them.
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might

Turn off these devices.
disturb the wireless communication.
Wireless network is not found.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
router (access point).
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are
The media sharing setting is not correct.
shared (p.103).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
unit to your PC.
The unit does not detect the PC.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
the PC to the same network.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.153).
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media
servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.103).
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
The files in the PC cannot be played back
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
continuously.
playback folder.
En 181
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence.
The Internet radio cannot be played. station later or select another station.
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number
network devices (such as the router).
varies depending on the radio station.
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
AirPlay. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV smartphone/tablet to the same network.
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.153).
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off. Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
No sound from the MusicCast compatible device. The MusicCast compatible device is not connected to the MusicCast
Connect the device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
network.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and start “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The MusicCast connection cannot be made on connected to the wireless network at your home. Disable the cellular data transmission.
“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off. Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and set the MusicCast compatible
connected to the wireless network at your home. device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
“MusicCast CONTROLLER” does not detect a
MusicCast compatible device. Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Enable the network standby function on the MusicCast compatible device.
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.167).
En 182
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.103).
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Access error Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.50).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
again.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
RemID Mismatch Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.165).
identical.
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
Remote Off
control sensor on the main unit is turned off. menu to “ON” (p.164).
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
reasons.
Unable to play Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.103). If the unit supports
the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic.
Update failed. Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
En 183
Glossary
This section explains the technical terms used in this manual. DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio
CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest
Audio information (audio decoding format) frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better
audio quality than that used for CDs.
Dolby Atmos DTS 96/24
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format
Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This
independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of
DTS Dialog Control
sound above the listener.
DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to help make the dialog
Dolby Atmos Stream more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that the content creator may disable the use
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may
TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata add more functionality to DTS Dialog Control or increase the range of the feature.
that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV
DTS Digital Surround
receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio.
Dolby Digital This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel
DTS-ES
audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds
Dolby Digital Plus a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that recorded.
support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Express
Dolby Enabled Speaker DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming
ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing
Dolby Surround multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for discs).
playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as
DTS-HD Master Audio
well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater
technology.
experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of
Dolby TrueHD 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition BD (Blu-ray discs).
home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96
kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD
(Blu-ray discs).
En 184
DTS Neo:6 WMA (Windows Media Audio)
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing
channels of surround sound. data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
DTS:X
DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from channels,
DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive soundscape - in
front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to
automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to
a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at
www.dts.com/dtsx
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in
compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression
method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10
maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on
Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3.
Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to DTS:X to
provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can
produce up to 11.x channels.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is
the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on
a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is
digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the
sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric
value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting
audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression
methods.
En 185
Audio Information (Others) HDMI and video information
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) Component video signal
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and
unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals
woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. is independent.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel Composite video signal
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and
added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel transmitted with a single cable.
is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. Deep Color
Lip sync Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using
in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to
output. increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital
contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal
transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any
loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video
interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and
allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of
sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.
En 186
Network information Yamaha technologies
SSID CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced
Wi-Fi in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall
material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet
hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the
wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with
audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home.
network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can
carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. CINEMA DSP HD3
WPS The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD3
feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a
intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
wireless home network.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such
as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones
have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed
on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left
and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front
surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence
speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed
of CINEMA DSP.
En 187
Supported devices and file formats File formats
This section explains the devices and file formats supported by the unit. For information about specifications of each file, refer to the instruction manual of your
recording device or consult file’s help.
Supported devices
For information about specifications of each device, refer to the instruction manual of it.
■ USB/PC (NAS)
Sampling frequency Quantization The number Gapless
File Bitrate
■ Bluetooth device (kHz) bitrate (bit) of channels playback
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP. 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
WAV * 16/24 - 2 ,
176.4/192
• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible,
MP3 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -
depending on the model.
WMA 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -

■ USB devices
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio FLAC 16/24 - 2 ,
176.4/192
players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
ALAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 16/24 - 2 ,
• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. AIFF 16/24 - 2 ,
176.4/192
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used. DSD 2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz 1 - 2 -
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB
* Linear PCM format only
storage device.
Y
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC
■ AirPlay files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
Lion or later, and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
Made for.
iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone
5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s
iPad Pro (9.7″ and 12.9″), iPad mini 4, iPad Air 2, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPad mini,
iPad (3rd and 4th generation), iPad 2
iPod touch (5th and 6th generation)
(as of May 2017)
En 188
Video signal flow Video conversion table
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output X
to a TV as shown below. • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
Video device The unit TV

HDMI out
Resolution 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K
480i/576i m m m m m m
480p/576p m m m m m
720p m m m m
HDMI in HDMI out
HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI
HDMI in 1080i m m m m
1080p/50, 60 Hz m m m m
1080p/24 Hz m m
4K m
COMPONENT
VIDEO in 480i/576i m m m m m m
COMPONENT COMPONENT
VIDEO VIDEO
PR PR
480p/576p m m m m m
PB PB
Y Y
COMPONENT VIDEO in
720p m m m m
1080i m m m m
VIDEO in
VIDEO VIDEO
VIDEO in 480i/576i m m m m m m
m: Available
En 189
Multi-zone output Information on HDMI
Audio signals that can be output to Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 vary depending on how you This section explains the functions related to HDMI and its signal compatibility.
connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks.
Using the unit’s internal

Using an external amplifier (p.113)
HDMI Control
amplifier (p.39)
HDMI OUT 2 HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
EXTRA SP 1-2 jacks ZONE OUT jacks
In \ Out (ZONE OUT) jack supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power
Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2) and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such
Digital audio (HDMI) m (*3) m (*3) m (*4) m (*5)
as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
Digital audio
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV and playback devices” (p.41) and
m (*6) m (*6) m (*6) m (*6) m (*6)
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL) “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.44).
Analog audio (AUDIO) m m m m m
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
USB (*7) m m m m m
• Standby synchronization
Network sources (*7) m m m m m
• Volume control including mute
TUNER m m m m m
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
m: Available • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Zone2 - • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
Audio Output: On)
(Example)
*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] HDMI Control HDMI Control
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.157) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
Playback device The unit turns off
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] also turns off (standby)
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected) Turn off the TV
*5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source
selected in the main zone is selected) Operations available from the unit’s remote control
*6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.76)
*7 To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2/Zone3 input • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
with the web control (p.119) or use the party mode (p.117).
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering remote
control codes (p.169)
En 190
(Example)
4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
HDMI Control HDMI Control
Playback starts Turns on and displays

video from the playback
device
Press SCENE 1
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. 5 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
Y 6 Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
7 Press ON SCREEN.
1 Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

3 Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
2 Configure the settings of the unit. Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
1 Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. 4 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback
devices.
2 Press ON SCREEN.
ON
SCREEN OPTION
ON SCREEN
5 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
Cursor keys
6
ENTER
ENTER Check the followings.

RETURN DISPLAY
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select
the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
7 Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
8 Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV
or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
En 191
Y HDMI signal compatibility
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4.
It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be
limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
output, depending on the type of the DVD player.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to
the TV.
the instruction manual for each device.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more
effectively. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream
signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback
device.
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal
to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1 Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
2 Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to
“AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
• “ARC” (p.151) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
• The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked
“ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for the TV.
Y
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.151) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.43).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
X
“AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO
1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.151) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.77), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE 2.
En 192
Trademarks
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
Laboratories.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi
Alliance®.
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)

The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol,
MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved. The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™ Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high environmental

performance.
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Supports iOS 7 or later for setup using Wireless Accessory Configuration.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an
electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod,
iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
meet Apple performance standards. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is Google Noto Fonts (Version 1.001)
with safety and regulatory standards. strictly prohibited. Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);
affect wireless performance.
Windows™ you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United You may obtain a copy of the License at
States and other countries. http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod touch, and Apple TV are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
iPad Air and iPad mini are trademarks of Apple Inc. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
United States and/or other countries. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
limitations under the License.
Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association. sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
under license. GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
En 193
Specifications
Input jacks [RX-A2070] • Video Format (Repeater Mode)
– Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND – VGA
• Analog Audio
BACK L/R) – 480i/60 Hz
[RX-A3070]
– ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3) – 576i/50 Hz
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, VIDEO AUX)
• HDMI Output – 480p/60 Hz
Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GHD, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1-2 *5) – 576p/50 Hz
[RX-A2070]
*5 barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4) – 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, VIDEO AUX)
Other jacks – 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• Digital Audio
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2) • YPAO MIC x 1
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) – 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• REMOTE IN x 1
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1-2, AUDIO 3) • Supported Audio Formats
• REMOTE OUT x 1
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 192 kHz) – Dolby Atmos
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• Video – DTS:X
• RS-232C x 1
Composite x 4 (AV 1-4) – Dolby TrueHD
Component x 2 (AV 1-2)
HDMI – Dolby Digital Plus
• HDMI Input • HDMI Features – Dolby Digital
HDMI x 8 (AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX) – 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60,50Hz 10/12bit) – DTS-HD Master Audio
• Others – 3D Video – DTS-HD High Resolution
USB x 1 (USB2.0) – ARC (Audio Return Channel) – DTS Express
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) – HDMI Control (CEC) – DTS
– Auto Lip Sync – DSD 2.8 MHz 2-ch to 6-ch
Output jacks
– 21:9 Aspect Ratio – PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24 bit)
• Analog Audio
– Deep Color • Content Protection: HDCP compatible
– Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
– x.v.Color (HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)
SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R *1, EXTRA SP 2 L/R *2)
– BT.2020 Colorimetry
*1 Note: Assignment is possible TUNER
– HDR (High Dynamic Range)
[F.PRESENCE, ZONE2, ZONE3, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
• Analog Tuner
– HD audio playback
*2 Note: Assignment is possible
[Australia model]
[R.PRESENCE, ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE] – Selectable HDMI input in HDMI standby mode
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)
– Subwoofer Out x 2 – HDMI Zone Output
[U.K., Europe and Russia models]
(SUBWOOFER 1-2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
– Headphone x 1
[Other models]
[RX-A3070]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
– Pre Out x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND
BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R *3, R.PRESENCE L/R *4) USB
*3 Note: barter to ZONE2 • Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory
*4 Note: barter to ZONE3 • Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
En 194
Bluetooth • Wi-Fi function Audio Section
– Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
• Sink Function • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
– Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection and
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet) [RX-A3070]
USB connection
• Source Function (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
– Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
AVR to Sink Device (ex. Bluetooth Headphone) Front L/R......................................................................165 W+165 W
– Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device Center ......................................................................................165 W
– Radio Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz
• Bluetooth Version........................................................... Ver. 2.1+EDR Surround L/R ...............................................................165 W+165 W
– Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
• Supported Profile Surround Back L/R ......................................................165 W+165 W
– Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency): 2412 MHz to 2472 MHz
Sink Function .................................................................A2DP, AVRCP Front Presence L/R......................................................165 W+165 W
– Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P): 17.5 dBm (56.2 mW)
Source Function .............................................................A2DP, AVRCP (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
• Supported Codec Compatible Decoding Formats Front L/R......................................................................150 W+150 W
Sink Function ....................................................................... SBC, AAC • Decoding Format Center ......................................................................................150 W
Source Function ............................................................................SBC – Dolby Atmos Surround L/R ...............................................................150 W+150 W
• Wireless Output ...................................................... Bluetooth Class 2 – Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus Surround Back L/R ......................................................150 W+150 W
• Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency)... 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz – Dolby Digital Front Presence L/R......................................................150 W+150 W
• Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P) .......................... 4.0 dBm (2.5 mW) – DTS:X (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
• Maximum Communication Distance ................................10 m (33 ft) – DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Front L/R......................................................................165 W+165 W
DTS Express Center ......................................................................................165 W
MusicCast
– DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 Surround L/R ...............................................................165 W+165 W
• Controlled by MusicCast Application (iOS, Android)
– DTS Digital Surround Surround Back L/R ......................................................165 W+165 W
• MusicCast Link Client ..........................................Main, Zone2, Zone3
• Post Decoding Format Front Presence L/R......................................................165 W+165 W
• MusicCast Link Master (Input Source) .................................................
– Dolby Surround [RX-A2070]
NET/USB/Bluetooth, Analog External Input, Digital External Input,
– Neural:X (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
Zone2
– DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema Front L/R......................................................................150 W+150 W
• Network Connectivity ....................................Extend Mode, Connect
Center ......................................................................................150 W
Network
Surround L/R ...............................................................150 W+150 W
• PC Client Function
Surround Back L/R ......................................................150 W+150 W
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
Front Presence L/R......................................................150 W+150 W
• AirPlay supported
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
• Internet Radio
Front L/R......................................................................140 W+140 W
Center ......................................................................................140 W
Surround L/R ...............................................................140 W+140 W
Surround Back L/R ......................................................140 W+140 W
Front Presence L/R......................................................140 W+140 W
En 195
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) • Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven) Surround L/R ..................................................................... 220 W/ch
Front L/R ......................................................................155 W+155 W [RX-A3070] Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 220 W/ch
Center ......................................................................................155 W (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω) Front Presence L/R............................................................ 220 W/ch
Surround L/R ...............................................................155 W+155 W Front L/R ............................................................................230 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF)
Surround Back L/R ......................................................155 W+155 W Center.................................................................................230 W/ch [RX-A3070]
Front Presence L/R......................................................155 W+155 W Surround L/R......................................................................230 W/ch Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω).........................................175/220/295/410 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) Surround Back L/R.............................................................230 W/ch [RX-A2070]
[RX-A3070] Front Presence L/R ............................................................230 W/ch Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω).........................................165/210/285/405 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) (1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω) • Damping Factor
Front L/R ............................................................................ 200 W/ch Front L/R ............................................................................230 W/ch Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω.........................................................150 or more
Center ................................................................................ 200 W/ch Center.................................................................................230 W/ch • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 200 W/ch Surround L/R......................................................................230 W/ch PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω).............................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 200 W/ch Surround Back L/R.............................................................230 W/ch AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)....................................200 mV/47 kΩ
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 200 W/ch Front Presence L/R ............................................................230 W/ch • Maximum Input Signal
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) [RX-A2070] PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .......................................... 45 mV or more
Front L/R ............................................................................ 185 W/ch (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω) AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .....................................2.4 V or more
Center ................................................................................ 185 W/ch Front L/R ............................................................................220 W/ch • Rated Output Level / Output Impedance
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 185 W/ch Center.................................................................................220 W/ch PRE OUT
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 185 W/ch Surround L/R......................................................................220 W/ch SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ...................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 185 W/ch Surround Back L/R.............................................................220 W/ch Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) .......................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω) Front Presence L/R ............................................................220 W/ch ZONE OUT.......................................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 230 W/ch (1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω) • Maximum Output Level
[RX-A2070] Front L/R ............................................................................220 W/ch PRE OUT/ZONE OUT ......................................................2.0 V or more
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) Center.................................................................................220 W/ch • Headphone Impedance ................................................. 16 Ω or more
Front L/R ............................................................................ 190 W/ch • Frequency Response
Center ................................................................................ 190 W/ch AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) .............................................+0/-3 dB
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 190 W/ch • RIAA Equalization Deviation
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 190 W/ch PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ...................................................... 0±0.5 dB
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 190 W/ch • Total Harmonic Distortion
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) [RX-A3070]
Front L/R ............................................................................ 175 W/ch PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ....................................0.04% or less
Center ................................................................................ 175 W/ch AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 75 W/ 8 Ω)
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 175 W/ch .....................................................................................0.04% or less
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 175 W/ch [RX-A2070]
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 175 W/ch PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ....................................0.04% or less
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω) AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W/ 8 Ω)

.....................................................................................0.04% or less
Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 220 W/ch
En 196
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) FM Section • Standby Power Consumption
(Pure Direct, Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out) HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
• Tuning Range
PHONO .......................................................................... 95 dB or more ......................................................................................................0.1 W
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...........................87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
AUDIO 2 etc ................................................................. 110 dB or more HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
[Brazil, Asia and General models]
Network Standby Off...................................................................1.5 W
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) .................................................. 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Speaker Out ...................................................................150 μV or less [U.K., Europe and Russia models]..............87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
Bluetooth Standby Off
• Channel Separation [Other models] ............................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
Wired.........................................................................................1.8 W
(Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Wireless (Wi-Fi).........................................................................1.8 W
PHONO ............................................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more Mono............................................................................. 3 μV (20.8 dBf)
Wireless Direct..........................................................................1.9 W
AUDIO 2 etc ........................................................ 75 dB/60 dB or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
• Volume Control Mono/Stereo ....................................................................69 dB/68 dB Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On...............1.7 W
Main Zone .............................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On
Zone2/Zone3 ........................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.5%/0.6% (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On ...................................2.7 W
• Tone Control Characteristics • Antenna Input ..........................................................75 Ω unbalanced • Maximum Power Consumption
Main Zone [Brazil, Asia and General models]............................................1210 W
AM section (except Australia, U.K., Europe
Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) • Dimensions (W x H x D)
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz
and Russia models) ................................. 435 x 192 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) • Tuning Range * Including legs and protrusions
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz [U.S.A. and Canada models]...............................530 kHz to 1710 kHz • Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)
Zone2/Zone3 [Brazil, Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz ................................. 435 x 247 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 18-5/8”)
Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) [Other models] ....................................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz * Including legs and protrusion
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz • Weight

DAB section (Australia, U.K., Europe and
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) [RX-A3070]
Russia models)
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz [China, Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models]
• Tuning Range ......................................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III) ............................................................................... 19.6 kg (43.2 lbs)
• Filter Characteristics
• Support Audio Format............... MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2 [Other models] ...................................................... 18.1 kg (39.9 lbs)
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
• Antenna ....................................................................75 Ω unbalanced [RX-A2070] ................................................................ 17.0 kg (37.5 lbs)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
............................................................................................. 12 dB/oct. General
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .............................................................. 24 dB/oct. • Power Supply * The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the
publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha
Video Section [U.S.A. and Canada models]....................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
website then download the manual file.
[Brazil and General models] .... AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Video Signal Type .................................................. NTSC/PAL/SECAM
[China model].............................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
• Video Signal Level
[Korea model] ............................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
Composite......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
[Australia model] ........................................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
Component
[U.K., Europe and Russia models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
Y...................................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
[Asia model] ................................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Pb/Pr ........................................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Power Consumption.................................................................. 490 W
• Video Maximum Input Level.....................................1.5 Vp-p or more
En 197
List of remote control codes
Asuka 0277, 0282, 0337, 0340, 0342 Carena 0320 Daewoo 0007, 0008, 0026, 0037, 0053,
TV Atlantic 0277, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350 Carnivale 0050 0167, 0266, 0275, 0277, 0282,
Atori 0323, 0343 Carrefour 0344 0315, 0320, 0323, 0331, 0335,
A.R. Systems 0320 Auchan 0321 Carver 0010 0342, 0343, 0350, 0381, 0465
Acme 0342 Audiosonic 0161, 0282, 0320, 0340, 0342, Cascade 0320, 0323, 0343 Dainichi 0277, 0340
Acura 0323, 0343 0343, 0349, 0350 Casio 0367 Dansai 0277, 0282, 0320, 0337, 0349,
ADC 0337 AudioTon 0161, 0282, 0342 Cathay 0320, 0349, 0350 0350
Admiral 0054, 0178, 0336, 0337, 0339, Audiovox 0058, 0179, 0194 CCE 0183, 0282 Dantax 0161, 0349
0346, 0347 Ausind 0171 Celebrity 0055, 0107 Dawa 0320
Advent 0158 Autovox 0171, 0282, 0337, 0339, 0342 Celera 0039 Daytron 0007, 0008, 0026, 0323, 0343
Adventura 0057 Aventura 0051 Centurion 0320, 0349, 0350 De Graaf 0346
Adyson 0277, 0282, 0342 Awa 0277, 0282 Century 0339 Decca 0282, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350
Agashi 0277, 0282 Axion 0156 CGE 0161, 0171 Dell 0145, 0245
Agazi 0337 Baird 0282 Changhong 0039 Denver 0358, 0362
Aiko 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342, Bang & Olufsen 0180, 0339 Chimei 0273 Desmet 0320, 0349, 0350
0343 Basic Line 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, Cimline 0323, 0343 Diamant 0320
Aim 0320 0350 Citizen 0007, 0008, 0026, 0050, 0058 Diamond 0277
Aiwa 0078, 0379 Bastide 0282, 0342 City 0323, 0343 DiamondVision 0135, 0143
Akai 0050, 0055, 0109, 0159, 0181, Baur 0320, 0349 Clarion 0179 Dimensia 0049
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, Bazin 0282 Clarivox 0349 Disney 0219
0343, 0349, 0350 Beko 0161, 0269, 0294, 0302, 0311, Clatronic 0161, 0171, 0282, 0320, 0323, Dixi 0282, 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349,
Akiba 0320, 0340 0320, 0328, 0351 0337, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0350, 0350
Akura 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340 Belcor 0008 0351 Dream Vision 0461, 0498
Alaron 0277 Bell & Howell 0019, 0054 CMS 0277 DTS 0323, 0343
Alba 0161, 0277, 0320, 0323, 0340, Benq 0097, 0242, 0361 CMS Hightec 0282 Dual 0282, 0320, 0342
0342, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0351, Beon 0320, 0349, 0350 Coby 0197 Dual-Tec 0342, 0343
0372, 0382 Best 0161 Colortyme 0008, 0026 Dumont 0008, 0030, 0062, 0282, 0339,
Albatron 0140 Bestar 0161, 0320, 0350 Commercial Solutions 0341, 0342
Alcyon 0171 BGH 0400 0021 Durabrand 0031, 0051, 0179, 0215
Alleron 0059 Binatone 0282, 0342 Concerto 0008, 0026 Dux 0349
Allorgan 0282 Blue Sky 0320, 0340 Concorde 0323, 0343 Dwin 0178
Allstar 0320, 0350 Blue Star 0348 Condor 0161, 0277, 0320, 0323, 0342, Dynatron 0320, 0349, 0350
America Action 0179 Boots 0282, 0342 0350, 0351 Dynex 0228, 0231
AMOi 0276 BPL 0320, 0348 Contec 0179, 0277, 0323, 0342, 0343, EIZO 0509
Amplivision 0161, 0282, 0321, 0342 Bradford 0058, 0179 0344 Elbe 0161, 0168, 0282, 0320
Amstrad 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0343 Brandt 0322, 0345 Contec/Cony 0012, 0058 Elcit 0339
Amtron 0058 Brillian 0182 Continental Edison Electa 0348
Anam 0179, 0343 Brinkmann 0320 0345 ELECTRO TECH 0343
Anam National 0052, 0058 Brionvega 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350 Cosmel 0323, 0343 Electroband 0055, 0107
Anglo 0323, 0343 Britannia 0277, 0282, 0342 Craig 0058, 0179 Electrograph 0176
Anitech 0171, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0343 Brockwood 0008 Crosley 0010, 0037, 0171, 0339 Electrohome 0008, 0026, 0052, 0055
Ansonic 0161, 0168, 0320, 0323, 0341, Broksonic 0109, 0179 Crown 0058, 0161, 0171, 0179, 0320, Element 0230
0343 Bruns 0339 0323, 0343, 0349, 0350, 0351 Elin 0277, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0349,
AOC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053 BTC 0340 CS Electronics 0277, 0340, 0342 0350
Apex 0039, 0111, 0217 Bush 0269, 0282, 0283, 0304, 0320, CTC Clatronic 0341 Elite 0320, 0340, 0350
Arcam 0277, 0282 0323, 0328, 0332, 0340, 0343, CTX 0205 Elman 0341
Arcam Delta 0342 0344, 0346, 0348, 0349, 0350, Curtis Mathes 0007, 0008, 0010, 0019, 0021, Elta 0277, 0323, 0343
Aristona 0320, 0349, 0350 0372, 0382, 0463, 0470, 0472 0026, 0049, 0050, 0178 Emerson 0000, 0007, 0008, 0012, 0013,
Arthur Martin 0321 byd:sign 0093 CXC 0058, 0179 0019, 0026, 0031, 0037, 0051,
ASA 0339, 0347 Candle 0008, 0026, 0050, 0057 Cybertron 0340 0058, 0059, 0161, 0179, 0320,
Asberg 0171, 0320, 0350 Capsonic 0337 Cytron 0152 0339
Astra 0343
En 198
Emprex 0154 Genexxa 0320, 0340, 0347, 0350 Hygashi 0277, 0282, 0342 Kendo 0161, 0320, 0341, 0346
Envision 0008, 0026, 0050 GFM 0128, 0227 Hyper 0277, 0282, 0323, 0342, 0343 Kenwood 0008, 0026, 0050
Epson 0155, 0206, 0359 Giant 0282 Hypson 0282, 0320, 0321, 0337, 0342, KIC 0282
Erres 0320, 0349, 0350 Gibralter 0008, 0030, 0050, 0062 0348, 0349, 0350 Kingsley 0277, 0342
ESA 0051 GoldHand 0277 Hyundai 0141 KLH 0039
ESC 0282 Goldline 0320 Iberia 0320 Kloss Novabeam 0057, 0058
Etron 0343 GoldStar 0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031, ICE 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, Kneissel 0161, 0168, 0320
Eurofeel 0282 0050, 0053, 0161, 0277, 0282, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0350 Kolster 0320, 0350
Euro-Feel 0337 0320, 0323, 0342, 0343, 0346, ICeS 0277 Konka 0340
Euroline 0349 0349, 0350 Ilo 0148, 0153 Korpel 0320, 0349, 0350
Euroman 0161, 0277, 0282 Goodmans 0246, 0272, 0282, 0320, 0323, IMA 0058 Korting 0161, 0339
Euromann 0320, 0337, 0342, 0350 0337, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0350, Imperial 0161, 0171, 0320, 0347, 0350, Kosmos 0320
Europhon 0277, 0282, 0320, 0341, 0342, 0462, 0473, 0477 0351 Koyoda 0343
0350 Gorenje 0161, 0351 Indiana 0320, 0349, 0350 KTV 0007, 0050, 0058, 0179, 0183,
Expert 0321 GPM 0340 Infinity 0010 0282, 0342
Exquisit 0320 GPX 0129 InFocus 0250, 0327, 0363, 0479, 0508 Kyoto 0277, 0282
Fenner 0323, 0343 Gradiente 0240 Ingelen 0347 Lasat 0161
Ferguson 0322, 0345, 0349 Graetz 0347 Ingersol 0323, 0343 Lenco 0323, 0343
Fidelity 0277, 0320, 0342, 0346 Granada 0171, 0282, 0320, 0321, 0342, Initial 0153 Lenoir 0323, 0342, 0343
Filsai 0282 0344, 0346, 0349, 0350 Inno Hit 0171, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, Leyco 0320, 0337, 0349, 0350
Finlandia 0346 Grandin 0340, 0343, 0348, 0349 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350 LG 0031, 0053, 0066, 0116, 0117,
Finlux 0171, 0282, 0320, 0339, 0341, Gronic 0282 Innovation 0337, 0343 0140, 0161, 0164, 0175, 0195,
0342, 0349, 0350 Grundig 0160, 0161, 0171, 0310, 0320 Insignia 0131, 0228, 0236, 0238 0269, 0277, 0282, 0300, 0309,
FIRST LINE 0342, 0343, 0350 Grunpy 0058, 0059, 0179 Inteq 0030 0317, 0320, 0323, 0328, 0342,
Firstline 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323 Haier 0157, 0233 Interactive 0161 0343, 0346, 0349, 0350, 0366,
Fisher 0019, 0161, 0282, 0339, 0342, Halifax 0277, 0282, 0337, 0342 Interbuy 0323, 0343 0368, 0377, 0466, 0471, 0478
0344, 0351 Hallmark 0008, 0026, 0031 Interfunk 0161, 0320, 0339, 0347, 0349, LG/GoldStar 0164
Flint 0320, 0350 Hampton 0277, 0282, 0342 0350 Liesenk 0349
Formenti 0171, 0277, 0336, 0339, 0342, Hanseatic 0161, 0168, 0282, 0320, 0323, International 0277 Liesenkotter 0320
0349 0342, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0350 Intervision 0161, 0282, 0320, 0337, 0341, Life 0337, 0343
Formenti/Phoenix 0277 Hantarex 0320, 0323, 0343 0342 Lifetec 0320, 0323, 0337, 0343
Fortress 0336, 0339 Hantor 0320 Irradio 0171, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, Lloyds 0323
Fraba 0161, 0320 Harman/Kardon 0010 0349, 0350 Loewe 0161, 0168, 0265, 0320, 0330,
Friac 0161 Harvard 0058, 0179 Isukai 0320, 0340 0352
Frontech 0282, 0323, 0337, 0343, 0346, Harwood 0320, 0323 ITC 0282, 0342 Loewe Opta 0339, 0349, 0350
0347 Havermy 0178 ITS 0277, 0320, 0340, 0348, 0350 Logik 0054
Fujitsu 0059, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0282 HCM 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0342, ITT 0343, 0347 Luma 0320, 0323, 0346, 0349
Fujitsu General 0282 0343, 0348 ITV 0320, 0343, 0349 Lumatron 0282, 0320, 0346, 0349, 0350
Fujitsu Siemens 0504, 0505, 0507, 0510, 0511 Hema 0282, 0323 Janeil 0057 Lux May 0350
Funai 0051, 0058, 0059, 0112, 0113, Hewlett Packard 0192 JBL 0010 Luxman 0008, 0026
0115, 0118, 0119, 0179, 0337, Higashi 0277 JC Penney 0007, 0008, 0026, 0027, 0049, Luxor 0282, 0342, 0346
0488, 0489 HiLine 0320 0053, 0056 LXI 0010, 0019, 0021, 0026, 0027,
Futuretech 0058, 0179 Hinari 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0344, JCB 0055, 0107 0031, 0049, 0111
Galaxi 0320, 0351 0349, 0350 Jensen 0008, 0026 M Electronic 0342, 0343, 0345, 0347, 0349,
Galaxis 0161, 0320 Hisawa 0321, 0340, 0348 JVC 0012, 0014, 0015, 0056, 0064, 0350
Gateway 0176, 0177, 0241 Hisense 0247 0065, 0067, 0169, 0174, 0297, MAG 0096
GBC 0323, 0343, 0344 Hitachi 0008, 0012, 0026, 0066, 0084, 0314, 0344, 0350, 0375 Magnadyne 0339, 0341, 0349
GE 0008, 0021, 0023, 0026, 0027, 0092, 0093, 0120, 0172, 0173, Kaisui 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, Magnafon 0171, 0277, 0341, 0342
0031, 0034, 0049, 0052, 0056, 0255, 0270, 0271, 0282, 0320, 0342, 0343, 0348 Magnavox 0008, 0009, 0010, 0013, 0026,
0209 0335, 0338, 0342, 0344, 0346, Kamosonic 0342 0032, 0033, 0048, 0050, 0128,
Geant Casino 0321 0347, 0365, 0382, 0448, 0456, Kamp 0277, 0342 0211, 0212, 0224, 0226, 0239
GEC 0282, 0320, 0342, 0347, 0349, 0467, 0482, 0484, 0487 Kapsch 0347 Magnum 0337, 0343
0350 Hornyphon 0320, 0350 Karcher 0161, 0320, 0342, 0343, 0349 Majestic 0054
Geloso 0323, 0343, 0346 Hoshai 0340 Kawasho 0008, 0026, 0055, 0277 Mandor 0337
General Technic 0323, 0343 Huanyu 0277, 0342 KEC 0179
En 199
Manesth 0282, 0320, 0337, 0342, 0349, NEI 0320, 0349, 0350 Philips 0008, 0009, 0010, 0011, 0012, Radiomarelli 0320, 0339
0350 Net-TV 0176 0032, 0048, 0049, 0052, 0122, Radiotone 0161, 0320, 0323, 0350
Marantz 0008, 0010, 0026, 0050, 0204, Neufunk 0320, 0323 0128, 0134, 0186, 0187, 0213, Rank 0344
0320, 0349, 0350 New Tech 0343, 0350 0221, 0224, 0226, 0239, 0256, RCA 0008, 0021, 0024, 0025, 0026,
Marelli 0339 New World 0340 0257, 0259, 0261, 0263, 0267, 0027, 0042, 0049, 0052, 0053,
Mark 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0349, NewTech 0282, 0320, 0323 0280, 0281, 0287, 0296, 0299, 0063, 0136, 0225
0350 Nicamagic 0277, 0342 0301, 0303, 0305, 0313, 0319, Realistic 0019, 0031, 0050, 0179
Masuda 0282 Nikkai 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0320, 0324, 0333, 0339, 0342, Recor 0320
Matsui 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0343, 0340, 0342, 0349, 0350 0349, 0350, 0353, 0357, 0360, Redstar 0320
0344, 0346, 0349, 0350, 0455 Nikko 0026, 0031, 0050 0380, 0383, 0452, 0459, 0460 Reflex 0320
Matsushita 0017 Nobliko 0171, 0277, 0341, 0342 Philips Magnavox 0011, 0032, 0033 Revox 0161, 0320, 0349, 0350
Maxent 0147, 0176 Nokia 0347 Phoenix 0161, 0277, 0320, 0339, 0349, Rex 0337, 0346, 0347
Mediator 0320, 0349, 0350 Norcent 0201 0350 RFT 0161, 0168, 0339
Medion 0320, 0337, 0343 Nordic 0282 Phonola 0277, 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350 Rhapsody 0277
Megapower 0140 Nordmende 0339, 0345, 0347, 0350 Pilot 0007, 0008, 0050 R-Line 0320, 0349, 0350
Megatron 0026, 0031 Nordvision 0349 Pioneer 0008, 0026, 0094, 0095, 0161, Roadstar 0323, 0337, 0340, 0343
MElectronic 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323 Novatronic 0320 0320, 0345, 0347, 0349, 0350, Robotron 0339
Melvox 0321 Oceanic 0321, 0347 0458, 0480 Rowa 0277, 0282, 0400, 0403, 0494
Memorex 0019, 0026, 0031, 0053, 0054, Okano 0161, 0320, 0351 Plantron 0320, 0323, 0337, 0350 Royal Lux 0161
0137, 0215, 0323, 0343 Olevia 0102, 0199, 0200, 0207, 0222 Playsonic 0282 RTF 0339
Memphis 0323, 0343 ONCEAS 0342 Polaroid 0039, 0142, 0202, 0234 Runco 0030, 0050, 0062
Mercury 0320, 0323 Onwa 0058, 0179 Poppy 0323, 0343 Saba 0298, 0322, 0339, 0345, 0347
Metz 0339 Opera 0320 Portland 0007, 0008, 0026, 0053 Saisho 0282, 0323, 0337, 0342, 0343
MGA 0008, 0026, 0031, 0050, 0053 Oppo 0130 Prandoni-Prince 0171, 0346 Salora 0346, 0347
Micromaxx 0337, 0343 Optimus 0017, 0019 Precision 0282, 0342 Sambers 0171, 0341
Microstar 0337, 0343 Optoma 0144 Prima 0157, 0243, 0323, 0343, 0347 Sampo 0007, 0008, 0026, 0050, 0176,
Midland 0007, 0021, 0023, 0027, 0030, Optonica 0178 Princeton 0140 0400
0056, 0062 Orbit 0320, 0350 Prism 0023, 0056 Samsung 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007, 0008,
Minerva 0171 Orion 0043, 0146, 0283, 0320, 0323, Profex 0323, 0343 0012, 0026, 0031, 0036, 0050,
Minoka 0320, 0350 0328, 0343, 0349, 0350 Profi-Tronic 0320, 0350 0053, 0076, 0077, 0079, 0114,
Mintek 0153 Orline 0320 Proline 0320, 0350 0124, 0125, 0126, 0127, 0139,
Mitsubishi 0008, 0026, 0031, 0053, 0066, Osaki 0282, 0320, 0337, 0340, 0342 Proscan 0021, 0027, 0049 0161, 0183, 0185, 0190, 0191,
0084, 0093, 0098, 0150, 0178, Oso 0340 Prosonic 0161, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0342, 0258, 0264, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0289, 0320, 0339, 0344, 0350, Otto Versand 0282, 0320, 0336, 0342, 0344, 0349 0323, 0334, 0337, 0342, 0343,
0376 0348, 0349, 0350 Protech 0282, 0337, 0341, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350, 0351, 0373, 0453,
Mivar 0161, 0168, 0171, 0277, 0282, Pael 0277, 0342 0349, 0350 0468
0342 Palladium 0161, 0282, 0320, 0342, 0351 Proton 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031 Sandra 0277, 0282, 0342
Monivision 0140 Palsonic 0282 Protron 0196 Sansui 0043, 0109, 0320, 0350, 0400
Montgomery Ward Panama 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, PROVIEW 0096, 0246 Sanyo 0008, 0019, 0068, 0070, 0071,
0054 0342, 0343 Provision 0320, 0349 0099, 0161, 0168, 0223, 0237,
Motion 0171 Panasonic 0016, 0017, 0020, 0022, 0023, Pulsar 0008, 0030, 0062 0277, 0282, 0288, 0295, 0323,
Motorola 0052, 0178 0035, 0052, 0056, 0084, 0085, Pye 0256, 0320, 0349, 0350, 0378 0342, 0344, 0369, 0469
MTC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053, 0161, 0133, 0163, 0193, 0284, 0286, Pymi 0323, 0343 SBR 0320, 0349
0277 0290, 0292, 0320, 0325, 0347, Quandra Vision 0321 Sceptre 0235, 0244
Multi System 0349 0356, 0483, 0485, 0490 Quasar 0017, 0023, 0052, 0056 Schaub Lorenz 0347
Multitech 0058, 0161, 0179, 0183, 0277, Panavision 0320 Quelle 0282, 0320, 0337, 0342, 0349, Schneider 0282, 0316, 0318, 0320, 0333,
0282, 0320, 0323, 0341, 0342, Pathe Cinema 0161, 0168, 0277, 0321, 0342 0350 0340, 0342, 0349, 0350, 0382
0343, 0344, 0346, 0349 Pausa 0323, 0343 Questa 0344 Scotch 0026, 0031
Murphy 0277, 0342 Penney 0021, 0023, 0031, 0050, 0111 Radialva 0320 Scott 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031, 0058,
NAD 0026, 0031, 0111 Perdio 0277, 0320 RadioShack 0019, 0021, 0031, 0050, 0179, 0059, 0149, 0179
Naonis 0346 Perfekt 0320 0320 Sears 0008, 0010, 0019, 0021, 0026,
NEC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0052, 0053, Philco 0008, 0009, 0010, 0012, 0026, RadioShack/Realistic 0027, 0031, 0049, 0051, 0059,
0072, 0103, 0282, 0344 0050, 0052, 0053, 0161, 0171, 0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0049, 0111
Neckermann 0161, 0282, 0320, 0339, 0342, 0320, 0339 0058 SEG 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0346, 0349, 0350, 0351 Philharmonic 0282, 0342 Radiola 0282, 0320, 0349, 0350 0341, 0342, 0344, 0349, 0382
En 200
SEI 0320 SuperTech 0277, 0320, 0323 Tomashi 0348 White Westinghouse
SEI-Sinudyne 0339, 0341, 0347 Supra 0323, 0343 Toshiba 0018, 0019, 0040, 0041, 0046, 0037, 0090, 0277, 0320, 0341,
Seleco 0344, 0346, 0347 Supre-Macy 0057 0073, 0100, 0103, 0108, 0109, 0342, 0349
Sencora 0323, 0343 Supreme 0055, 0107 0111, 0121, 0132, 0166, 0208, Wincom 0101, 0106
Sentra 0323 Susumu 0340 0210, 0214, 0217, 0260, 0268, Xrypton 0320
Serino 0277 Sutron 0323, 0343 0282, 0283, 0293, 0304, 0306, Yamaha 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053, 0080,
Sharp 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0007, SVA 0151 0307, 0329, 0344, 0355, 0454, 0081, 0082, 0083, 0086, 0087
0008, 0012, 0026, 0060, 0088, Sydney 0277, 0282, 0342 0491 Yamishi 0282, 0320
0089, 0091, 0138, 0165, 0170, Sylvania 0008, 0009, 0010, 0011, 0013, Totevision 0007 Yokan 0320
0178, 0198, 0229, 0262, 0278, 0026, 0048, 0050, 0051, 0128, Towada 0282, 0347 Yoko 0161, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0279, 0291, 0308, 0312, 0336, 0227, 0253 Trakton 0282 0337, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0349,
0344, 0354, 0370, 0449, 0450, Symphonic 0051, 0058, 0062, 0128, 0179, Trans Continens 0282, 0320 0350
0451, 0464, 0474, 0476, 0481 0215 Transtec 0277 Yorx 0340
Sheng Chia 0178 Syntax 0199 Trident 0282 Zanussi 0282, 0346
Shogun 0008 Syntax-Brillian 0199 Triumph 0320 Zenith 0008, 0028, 0029, 0030, 0031,
Siarem 0320, 0339, 0341 Sysline 0349 Uher 0161, 0171, 0320, 0347, 0350 0054, 0061, 0062
Sierra 0320, 0350 Sytong 0277 Ultravox 0277, 0320, 0339, 0341, 0342
Siesta 0161 Tandy 0178, 0282, 0336, 0340, 0342, Unic Line 0320
Signature 0054 0347 United 0349
Silva 0277 Tashiko 0277, 0282, 0342, 0344, 0346 Universum 0161, 0171, 0282, 0320, 0337,
VCR
Silver 0344 Tatung 0052, 0177, 0282, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350, 0351 ABS 1016
Singer 0321, 0339, 0341 0349, 0350 Univox 0320 Adventura 1069
Sinudyne 0320, 0339, 0341, 0349 TCM 0337, 0343 Vector Research 0050 Adyson 1008
Skantic 0347 TCL 0400, 0401, 0403, 0406, 0494 Vestel 0282, 0320, 0346, 0347, 0349, Aiwa 1024, 1026, 1027, 1069
Skyworth 0402, 0492, 0493, 0495 Teac 0282, 0320, 0400 0350, 0351 Akai 1021, 1027
Solavox 0347 Tec 0282, 0323, 0342, 0343 Vexa 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349 Akiba 1008, 1029
Sonitron 0161, 0282 Technics 0017, 0023, 0056 Victor 0015, 0344, 0350 Akura 1008, 1027, 1029
Sonoko 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0342, TechniSat 0274, 0496, 0497, 0499 VIDEOLOGIC 0277 Alba 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029,
0343, 0349, 0350 Techwood 0008, 0023, 0026, 0056 Videologique 0277, 0282, 0340, 0342 1030
Sonolor 0321, 0347 TEDELEX 0282 VideoSystem 0320, 0350 Alienware 1016
Sontec 0161, 0320, 0349, 0350 Teknika 0007, 0008, 0010, 0012, 0026, Videotechnic 0277, 0282 Ambassador 1030
Sony 0038, 0044, 0045, 0047, 0055, 0053, 0054, 0058, 0059, 0179 Vidikron 0010 American High 1068
0090, 0104, 0105, 0107, 0110, Teleavia 0345 Vidtech 0008, 0026, 0031, 0053 Amstrad 1008, 1009, 1026
0123, 0184, 0220, 0248, 0249, Telecor 0282, 0320 Viewsonic 0176, 0203, 0232, 0364 Anitech 1008, 1029
0251, 0252, 0254, 0326, 0343, Telefunken 0320, 0322, 0345, 0350 Viking 0057 Apex 1088
0344, 0371, 0374, 0457, 0475, Telegazi 0320 Viore 0148 ASA 1028, 1031
0486 Telemeister 0320 Visiola 0277, 0342 Asha 1070
Sound & Vision 0340, 0341 Telesonic 0320 Vision 0282, 0320, 0350 Asuka 1008, 1026, 1028, 1029, 1031
Soundesign 0008, 0026, 0031, 0058, 0059, Telestar 0320 Vizio 0008, 0177, 0218, 0242, 0500, Audio Dynamics 1064
0179 Teletech 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349 0501, 0502, 0503, 0506 Audiosonic 1009
Soundwave 0320, 0349, 0350 Teleton 0282, 0342 Vortec 0320, 0349, 0350 Audiovox 1071
Squareview 0051 Televideon 0277 Voxson 0171, 0320, 0339, 0346, 0347, Baird 1009, 1025, 1026, 1027
SSS 0008, 0058, 0179 Televiso 0321 0350 Bang & Olufsen 1017
Standard 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0342, Tensai 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, Waltham 0282, 0320, 0342 Basic Line 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029,
0343, 0350 0350 Wards 0008, 0009, 0010, 0026, 0031, 1030
Starlite 0058, 0179, 0320, 0323, 0349 Tesmet 0350 0048, 0049, 0050, 0053, 0054, Baur 1028
Stenway 0348 Tevion 0337, 0343 0059 Beaumark 1070
Stern 0346, 0347 Texet 0277, 0282, 0323, 0342 Watson 0320, 0349, 0350 Bell & Howell 1065
Strato 0320, 0323 Thomson 0162, 0188, 0189, 0285, 0320, Watt Radio 0277, 0341, 0342 Bestar 1009, 1025, 1030
Stylandia 0282 0322, 0342, 0345, 0350 Waycon 0111 Black Panther Line
Sunkai 0343 Thorn 0320, 0349 Wega 0320, 0339, 0344 1009, 1025
Sunstar 0320, 0323 TMK 0008, 0026, 0031 Wegavox 0323 Blaupunkt 1028
Sunwood 0320, 0323, 0343, 0350 TNCi 0030 Weltblick 0282, 0320, 0349, 0350 Bondstec 1008, 1030
Superla 0277, 0282, 0342 Tokai 0282, 0320, 0350 Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220 Broksonic 1100
Superscan 0013, 0178 Tokyo 0277, 0342
En 201
Bush 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029, Fisher 1065 Instant Replay 1068 Mitsubishi 1026, 1028, 1079
1049, 1051, 1063, 1217 Flint 1024 Interbuy 1008, 1031 Motorola 1068
Calix 1071 Formenti/Phoenix1028 Interfunk 1028 MTC 1070
Candle 1070, 1071 Frontech 1030 Intervision 1009, 1026 Multitech 1008, 1026, 1028, 1029, 1030,
Canon 1068 Fuji 1068 Irradio 1008, 1029, 1031 1069, 1070
Cathay 1009 Fujitsu 1026 ITT 1027 Murphy 1026
Catron 1030 Funai 1026, 1069 ITV 1009, 1025, 1031 NEC 1027, 1064, 1065
CGE 1026, 1027 Galaxy 1026 JC Penney 1064, 1065, 1068, 1070, 1071 Neckermann 1027, 1028
Cimline 1008, 1024, 1029 Garrard 1069 JCL 1068 NEI 1028
CineVision 1104 Gateway 1016 JVC 1007, 1018, 1027, 1039, 1064, Nesco 1008, 1029
Citizen 1070, 1071 GBC 1029, 1030 1065, 1066, 1067, 1078, 1089, Nikkai 1008, 1009, 1030
Clatronic 1008, 1030 GE 1068, 1070 1092, 1093, 1094, 1095, 1113, Nikko 1071
Colortyme 1064 GEC 1028 1208, 1209, 1212, 1213, 1215, Niveus Media 1016
Condor 1009, 1025, 1030 Geloso 1029 1218 Noblex 1070
Craig 1070, 1071 General 1030 Kaisui 1008, 1029 Nokia 1009, 1027
Crown 1008, 1009, 1025, 1029, 1030 General Technic 1024 Karcher 1028 Nordmende 1027
Curtis Mathes 1064, 1068, 1070 GOI 1018 Kendo 1008, 1024, 1025, 1030 Northgate 1016
Cybernex 1070 GoldHand 1008, 1029 Kenwood 1027, 1064, 1065 Oceanic 1026, 1027
CyberPower 1016 Goldstar 1026, 1031, 1064, 1071 Kodak 1068, 1071 Okano 1008, 1009, 1024
Daewoo 1009, 1025, 1030, 1038, 1069, Goodmans 1008, 1009, 1025, 1026, 1029, Korpel 1008, 1029 Olympus 1068
1223 1030, 1031 Kyoto 1008 Optimus 1071
Dansai 1008, 1009, 1029 Gradiente 1069 Lenco 1025 Orion 1023, 1024, 1051, 1115, 1217
Dantax 1024 Graetz 1027 Leyco 1008, 1029 Orson 1026
Daytron 1009, 1025 Granada 1028 LG 1010, 1026, 1031, 1047, 1054, Osaki 1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
DBX 1064 Grandin 1008, 1009, 1025, 1026, 1029, 1056, 1071, 1103, 1221 Otto Versand 1028
De Graaf 1028 1030, 1031 Lifetec 1024 Palladium 1008, 1027, 1029, 1031
Decca 1026, 1027, 1028 Grundig 1028, 1029 Linksys 1016 Panasonic 1000, 1022, 1044, 1055, 1068,
Dell 1016 Hanseatic 1009, 1028, 1031 Lloyd's 1069 1072, 1085, 1090, 1091, 1120,
Denko 1008 Harley Davidson 1069 Loewe Opta 1028, 1031 1121, 1214
DiamondVision 1096 Harman/Kardon 1064 Logik 1008, 1029 Pathe Marconi 1027
DigiFusion 1014 Harwood 1008 Lumatron 1009, 1025 Perdio 1026
DIRECTV 1019, 1105, 1110, 1111, 1113, HCM 1008, 1029 Luxor 1008 Philco 1008, 1068
1116, 1122 Headquarter 1065 LXI 1071 Philips 1006, 1013, 1028, 1035, 1040,
Dish Network 1018 Hewlett Packard 1016 M Electronic 1026 1045, 1046, 1050, 1058, 1059,
Dishpro 1018 Hinari 1008, 1009, 1024, 1029 Magnavox 1020, 1068, 1114, 1126 1061, 1068, 1076, 1101, 1110,
Dual 1009, 1027, 1028 Hisawa 1024 Magnin 1071 1113, 1116, 1117, 1122, 1126,
Dumont 1026, 1028 Hitachi 1011, 1026, 1027, 1028, 1046, Manesth 1008, 1029 1210, 1211
Durabrand 1114 1062 Marantz 1028, 1064, 1065, 1068 Philips Magnavox 1076
Dynatech 1069 HNS 1110 Mark 1009 Phonola 1028
Echostar 1018 Howard Computers Marta 1071 Pilot 1071
Elbe 1009 1016 Matsui 1024, 1031 Pioneer 1028, 1036
Elcatech 1008 HP 1016 Matsushita 1068 Polaroid 1088, 1099
Electrohome 1071 HTS 1018 Media Center PC 1016 Portland 1009, 1025, 1030
Electrophonic 1071 Hughes 1111, 1113, 1122 Mediator 1028 Prinz 1026
Elsay 1008 Hughes Network Systems Medion 1024 Profex 1029
Elta 1008, 1009, 1029 1110, 1116 MEI 1068 Proline 1026
Emerson 1008, 1020, 1068, 1069, 1071 Humax 1012, 1110, 1113 Memorex 1023, 1026, 1031, 1065, 1068, Proscan 1019
ESC 1009, 1025 Hush 1016 1069, 1070, 1071, 1098, 1114 Prosonic 1009, 1024
Etzuko 1008, 1029 Hypson 1008, 1009, 1024, 1029 Memphis 1008, 1029 Pulsar 1114
Expressvu 1018 iBUYPOWER 1016 MGN Technology 1070 Pye 1028, 1102
Ferguson 1027 Impego 1030 Micromaxx 1024 Quarter 1065
Fidelity 1008, 1026 Imperial 1026 Microsoft 1016 Quartz 1065
Finlandia 1028 Inno Hit 1008, 1009, 1025, 1028, 1029, Microstar 1024 Quasar 1068
Finlux 1026, 1027, 1028 1030 Migros 1026 Quelle 1026, 1028
Firstline 1008, 1024, 1029, 1031 Innovation 1024 Mind 1016 Radialva 1008
En 202
RadioShack 1071 Stack 9 1016 Voodoo 1016 California Audio Labs
RadioShack/Realistic Standard 1009, 1025 Wards 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071 2151
1065, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071 Stern 1009 Weltblick 1031 Cambridge Audio 2354
Radiola 1028 STS 1068 XR-1000 1068, 1069 CAT 2352, 2353
Radix 1071 Sunkai 1024 Yamaha 1064, 1065 CAVS 2192
Randex 1071 Sunstar 1026 Yamishi 1008, 1029 Centrum 2353
RCA 1019, 1068, 1070, 1075, 1110, Suntronic 1026 Yokan 1008, 1029 CGV 2354, 2362
1113, 1122, 1125 Sunwood 1008, 1029 Yoko 1008, 1029, 1030, 1031 Changhong 2140
Realistic 1065, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071 Superscan 1020 Zenith 1114 Cinetec 2363
ReplayTV 1022, 1123 Sylvania 1020, 1068, 1069, 1102, 1126 ZT Group 1016 CineVision 2133, 2237
Rex 1027 Symphonic 1008, 1069, 1126 Clatronic 2358, 2367
RFT 1008, 1028, 1030 Systemax 1016 Coby 2031, 2046, 2360
Ricavision 1016 Tagar Systems 1016 Conia 2383
Roadstar 1008, 1009, 1025, 1029, 1031 Taisho 1024
DVD Continental Edison
Royal 1008 Tandberg 1009 4Kus 2051 2363
Runco 1114 Tandy 1065 Accurian 2142 Crown 2362
Saba 1027 Tashiko 1026, 1071 Advent 2155, 2251 C-Tech 2355
Saisho 1024, 1029 Tatung 1026, 1027, 1028 AEG 2362 Curtis Mathes 2139
Samsung 1002, 1034, 1041, 1043, 1057, TCM 1015, 1024, 1042 Airis 2364 CVG 2377
1060, 1070, 1084, 1110, 1116, Teac 1009, 1069 Aiwa 2322 CyberHome 2022, 2098, 2138, 2187, 2336
1122, 1124, 1220, 1222 Tec 1008, 1009, 1030 Akai 2145, 2177, 2179, 2248 Cytron 2244
Samurai 1008, 1030 Technics 1068 Akura 2356 Daenyx 2363
Sanky 1114 Teknika 1068, 1069, 1071 Alba 2064, 2165, 2186, 2337, 2346 Daewoo 2001, 2133, 2276, 2298, 2330,
Sansui 1023, 1027, 1106, 1115 Teleavia 1027 Alco 2149 2362, 2363, 2377
Sanyo 1032, 1065, 1070 Telefunken 1027 Alize 2361 Daewoo International
Saville 1009 Teletech 1008, 1009 Allegro 2133 2363
SBR 1028 Tenosal 1008, 1029 Amitech 2362 Dalton 2357
Schaub Lorenz 1026, 1027 Tensai 1008, 1026, 1029, 1031 Amphion MediaWorks Dansai 2362, 2381
Schneider 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1026, Tevion 1024 2195 Daytek 2184, 2195, 2363
1028, 1029, 1030, 1031 Thomson 1005, 1027 AMW 2195, 2363 Dayton 2363
Sears 1065, 1068, 1071 Thorn 1027 Apex 2030, 2124, 2125, 2126, 2127, DEC 2358
SEG 1008, 1009, 1029 Tivo 1108, 1110, 1111, 1113, 1117, 2130, 2131 Decca 2362
SEI-Sinudyne 1028 1118, 1119, 1122 Apple 2241 Denon 2059, 2151, 2193, 2332
Seleco 1027 TMK 1070 Arrgo 2138 Denver 2356, 2358, 2360, 2370
Sentra 1008, 1030 Tokai 1008, 1029, 1031 Asono 2364 Denzel 2380
Sentron 1008, 1029 Tonsai 1029 Aspire 2152, 2222 Desay 2205
Sharp 1003, 1033, 1077, 1107, 1127, Toshiba 1004, 1016, 1027, 1028, 1037, Astar 2240 Diamond 2354, 2355
1219 1049, 1052, 1086, 1087, 1097, ATACOM 2364 DiamondVision 2225, 2232
Shintom 1008, 1029 1109, 1112, 1194 Audiovox 2061, 2149 Disney 2010, 2028
Shivaki 1031 Totevision 1070, 1071 Avious 2367 DK Digital 2339
Shogun 1070 Touch 1016 Awa 2363 Dmtech 2176
Siemens 1031 Towada 1008, 1029 Axion 2249 Dual 2380
Silva 1031 Towika 1008, 1029 Bang & Olufsen 2128 DUNE 2509
Silver 1009 TVA 1030 Baze 2367 Durabrand 2136
Singer 1068 Uher 1031 BBK 2364 DVX 2355
Sinudyne 1028 UltimateTV 1019 Bellagio 2363 Easy Home 2359
Solavox 1030 Ultravox 1009 Best Buy 2359 Eclipse 2354
Sonic Blue 1022, 1123 Unitech 1070 Blaupunkt 2131 E-Dem 2364
Sonneclair 1008 United Quick Star 1009, 1025 Blue Parade 2157 Electrohome 2362
Sonoko 1009, 1025 Universum 1026, 1028, 1031 Boghe 2382 Elin 2362
Sontec 1031 Vector Research 1064 Brainwave 2362 Elta 2341, 2361, 2362
Sony 1001, 1016, 1048, 1053, 1073, Video Concepts 1064 Brandt 2148, 2188 Emerson 2129, 2137, 2150
1074, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083, Videon 1024 Broksonic 2145, 2146 Enterprise 2129
1108, 1118, 1216 Videosonic 1070 Bush 2064, 2110, 2170, 2268, 2290, Enzer 2380
Stack 1016 Viewsonic 1016 2346, 2358, 2367, 2383 Epson 2247
En 203
ESA 2137 Kiss 2380 Optim 2381 Rowa 2154, 2383
Finlux 2354, 2362, 2367 KLH 2131, 2149 Optimus 2180 Rownsonic 2353
Fintec 2377 Koda 2358 Orava 2358 Saba 2148, 2188
Fisher 2134 Koss 2013, 2148, 2158 Orbit 2363 Sabaki 2355
Funai 2137 KXD 2359 Orion 2073, 2110 Saivod 2362
Gateway 2051 Landel 2143 Oritron 2148, 2158 Sampo 2141
GE 2029, 2131, 2156 Lasonic 2132 P&B 2358 Samsung 2000, 2045, 2077, 2112, 2113,
Gericom 2351 Lawson 2355 Pacific 2355 2114, 2115, 2151, 2200, 2216,
GFM 2226 Lecson 2381 Panasonic 2011, 2024, 2034, 2042, 2058, 2219, 2228, 2264, 2265, 2271,
Giec 2382 Lenco 2358, 2362, 2367 2062, 2066, 2067, 2093, 2116, 2279, 2294, 2303, 2329, 2365
Global Solutions 2355 Lenoxx 2136, 2153 2117, 2118, 2119, 2120, 2121, Sansui 2073, 2145, 2354, 2355, 2362
Global Sphere 2355 LG 2002, 2033, 2038, 2057, 2129, 2122, 2123, 2151, 2159, 2164, Sanyo 2134, 2145, 2217, 2292
Go Video 2133, 2213 2133, 2189, 2191, 2223, 2238, 2166, 2167, 2172, 2173, 2175, ScanMagic 2186
Goodmans 2165, 2280, 2291, 2358, 2371, 2270, 2288, 2335, 2373, 2375 2209, 2214, 2275, 2277, 2278, Schaub Lorenz 2362
2376, 2382 Life 2182 2281, 2282, 2283, 2301, 2374, Schneider 2176
GPX 2227 Lifetec 2182 2470 Scientific Labs 2355
Gradiente 2151 Limit 2355 Parasound 2197 Scott 2161, 2357
Graetz 2380 Liquid Video 2158 peeKTON 2364 Seeltech 2364
Greenhill 2131 Liteon 2043, 2051, 2142 Philips 2008, 2012, 2025, 2044, 2050, SEG 2161, 2355, 2363, 2380
Grundig 2349 Loewe 2320 2051, 2053, 2060, 2072, 2108, Sharp 2006, 2040, 2088, 2091, 2182,
Grunkel 2362, 2366 LogicLab 2355 2111, 2147, 2159, 2163, 2169, 2194, 2220, 2221, 2231, 2236,
GVG 2377 Magnavox 2025, 2050, 2137, 2150, 2159, 2174, 2181, 2185, 2230, 2261, 2293, 2340
H&B 2358 2224, 2230, 2358 2266, 2267, 2286, 2287, 2289, Shinsonic 2245
H_her 2364 Magnex 2367 2295, 2300, 2302, 2317, 2328, Sigmatek 2359, 2364
Haaz 2354, 2355 Majestic 2360 2338, 2342, 2350, 2467 Silva 2356
Haier 2254 Marantz 2328 Phonotrend 2367 Singer 2354, 2355
Harman/Kardon 2047, 2135 Marquant 2362 Pioneer 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2035, Skymaster 2325, 2355
HiMAX 2359 Matsui 2148, 2378 2092, 2094, 2095, 2109, 2157, Skyworth 2356
Hitachi 2062, 2090, 2115, 2274, 2316, McIntosh 2199 2180, 2190, 2212, 2269, 2272, Slim Art 2362
2359, 2380 Mecotek 2362 2299, 2304, 2305, 2306, 2307, SM Electronic 2355
Hiteker 2130 Medion 2182 2308, 2309, 2310, 2311, 2344, Sonic Blue 2133
Home Tech Industries Memorex 2028, 2145, 2234 2345, 2347, 2379 Sontech 2366
2364 MiCO 2354, 2382 Pointer 2362 Sony 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009, 2014,
Hyundai 2366 Micromaxx 2182 Polaroid 2125, 2215, 2235 2015, 2023, 2026, 2027, 2052,
Ilo 2245 Microsoft 2156 Portland 2362 2068, 2069, 2070, 2071, 2074,
Initial 2131, 2245 Microstar 2182 Powerpoint 2363 2075, 2084, 2085, 2087, 2168,
Innovation 2182 Minoka 2362 Prima 2252 2171, 2208, 2210, 2211, 2258,
Insignia 2002, 2137, 2253 Minowa 2367 Proceed 2130 2273, 2284, 2285, 2312, 2313,
Integra 2157 Mintek 2131, 2245 Proscan 2156 2314, 2315, 2318, 2319, 2466
Irradio 2053 Mitsubishi 2003 Prosonic 2360, 2377 Soundmaster 2355
iSymphony 2246 Mizuda 2358, 2359 Protron 2202 Soundmax 2355
JBL 2135 Monyka 2380 Provision 2358 Spectra 2363
JVC 2020, 2096, 2097, 2099, 2100, Mustek 2186 Pye 2144 Spectroniq 2201
2101, 2102, 2103, 2106, 2107, Mx Onda 2354 Qwestar 2148 Standard 2355
2160, 2257, 2260, 2262, 2263, Mystral 2366 Raite 2380 Star Cluster 2355
2321, 2324, 2326, 2327, 2343, Naiko 2362 RCA 2021, 2029, 2104, 2105, 2131, Starmedia 2358, 2364
2464, 2465, 2468, 2469, 2471 Nesa 2131 2149, 2156, 2157, 2229 Sungale 2204
Jwin 2198 Neufunk 2380 RedStar 2356, 2360, 2362 Sunkai 2362
Kansai 2360 Nevir 2362 Regent 2153 Superscan 2150
Kawasaki 2149 Next Base 2143 Reoc 2355 Supervision 2355
Kennex 2362 Nexxtech 2243 Rimax 2361 Sylvania 2012, 2137, 2150, 2178, 2230,
Kenwood 2041, 2151, 2348 NU-TEC 2383 Rio 2133 2239
KeyPlug 2362 Onkyo 2159, 2368 Roadstar 2331, 2358 Symphonic 2108, 2230
Kiiro 2362 Oopla 2051 Ronin 2363 Synn 2355
Kingavon 2358 Oppo 2196, 2255 Rotel 2203 T.D.E. Systems 2366
En 204
Tatung 2001, 2362 JVC 2472, 2473, 2475, 2478, 2496, Sanyo 2217 GE 3066, 3093
TCM 2182, 2297 2499, 2511 Sony 2004, 2005, 2007, 2052, 2068, GEC 3105
Teac 2149, 2333, 2355, 2383 LG 2033, 2456, 2457 2069, 2074, 2208, 2210, 2211 Gemini 3072, 3123
Tec 2356 Marantz (US) 2454, 2455 Sylvania 2239 General Instrument
Technics 2151 Mitsubishi 2450, 2451 Toshiba 2032, 2036, 2037, 2039, 2049, 3017, 3025, 3066, 3084, 3090,
Technika 2362, 2367 Onkyo 2504 2054, 2055, 2076 3096, 3117
Telefunken 2353 Panasonic 2011, 2209, 2214, 2476, 2477, Yamaha 2056 Goldstar 3120
Tensai 2362 2479 Gooding 3099
Tevion 2182, 2355, 2357 Philips 2510 Grundig 3098, 3099
Theta Digital 2157 Pioneer 2212, 2506 Hamlin 3073, 3078
Thomson 2183, 2188, 2334, 2372 Samsung 2045, 2113, 2498
Cable Hirschmann 3097
Tokai 2356, 2380 Sharp 2194, 2220, 2221, 2497, 2502, ABC 3002, 3003, 3017, 3066, 3067, Hitachi 3066
Top Suxess 2364 2503 3086, 3093, 3119, 3122 HomeChoice 3106
Toshiba 2032, 2036, 2037, 2039, 2048, Sony 2075, 2453, 2458, 2459, 2507 ADB 3020 Humax 3021, 3080, 3083
2049, 2054, 2055, 2072, 2073, Toshiba 2462 Adelphia 3081 ITT Nokia 3097
2076, 2078, 2079, 2086, 2145, Yamaha 2064, 2448, 2449, 2474, 2505 Alcatel 3016 Jasco 3123
2159, 2218, 2233, 2256, 2259, Americast 3124 Jerrold 3017, 3018, 3025, 3066, 3072,
2296, 2369, 2508 Amstrad 3022, 3098 3084, 3090, 3096, 3119, 3123
TRANScontinents 2363, 2367 Antronix 3065, 3070 JVC 3099
Transonic 2367
DVR Archer 3070 Kabel Deutschland
Trio 2362 Bush 2110 Arcon 3098 3024, 3027, 3121
Trutech 2242 Hitachi 2090 AT&T 3095 Macab 3101
TruVision 2359 Panasonic 2066, 2067, 2093, 2116, 2117, Axis 3098 Magnavox 3079
TSM 2364 2119, 2120, 2122, 2123 Bell South 3124 Maspro 3099
Umax 2361 Philips 2108, 2111 Cable Vision 3092 Matsui 3099
United 2367 Pioneer 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2092, Cabletenna 3065 MegaCable 3117
Urban Concepts 2159 2094, 2095, 2109 Cabletime 3104 Memorex 3076, 3122
US Logic 2245 RCA 2105 Cableview 3087 Minerva 3099
Venturer 2149 Samsung 2113, 2219 Clearmaster 3127 Mnet 3107
Viewmaster 2364 Sharp 2088, 2091 ClearMax 3127 Motorola 3025, 3026, 3084, 3088, 3090,
Vocopro 2206 Sony 2084, 2085, 2087 Clyde Cablevision 3105 3095, 3117
VocoStar 2207 Toshiba 2086 Colour Voice 3068 Movie Time 3077, 3109
Waitec 2364 Victor 2475 Comcast 3084, 3088, 3117 Mr Zapp 3101
Welltech 2382 Yamaha 2089, 2118 Comcrypt 3107 Multichoice 3107
Westinghouse 2063, 2250 Comtronics 3069 Multitech 3127
Wharfedale 2354, 2355 Contec 3074 NEC 3064
Woxter 2361, 2364 Coolmax 3127 NET Brazil 3085
Xbox 2156, 2183
DVD Recorder COX 3084 Nokia 3097
Xlogic 2355, 2362 Aspire 2222 Cryptovision 3110 Noos 3101
XMS 2362 Astar 2240 Director 3084 NSC 3077
Xoro 2382 Broksonic 2146 Eastern 3075 Oak 3074
Yamada 2051, 2361, 2363 Go Video 2213 Everquest 3123 Pace 3006, 3089, 3121
Yamaha 2056, 2064, 2065, 2080, 2081, Hitachi 2062 Fidelity 3098 Palladium 3099
2082, 2083, 2089, 2118, 2151, Insignia 2002 Filmnet 3107 Panasonic 3112, 3118, 3122
2323 Irradio 2053 Filmnet Cablecrypt Paragon 3122
Yamakawa 2363, 2380 JVC 2100, 2101, 2106, 2107 3111 Philips 3068, 3071, 3079, 3099, 3100,
Yukai 2186 LG 2033, 2057, 2223, 2238 Filmnet Comcrypt 3101, 3103
Zenith 2002, 2129, 2133, 2159, 2223 Liteon 2043 3111 Pioneer 3001, 3006, 3094, 3098, 3114,
Panasonic 2011, 2034, 2058, 2062, 2116, Finlux 3097 3116, 3120
2117, 2119, 2120, 2121, 2123 FIOS 3005 Popular Mechanics
Philips 2008, 2044, 2050, 2051, 2147 Focus 3126 3126
Blu-ray Disc Pioneer 2017, 2035 Foxtel 3022 Proscan 3066, 3093
Denon 2452, 2500, 2501 Pye 2144 France Telecom 3100, 3101 Pulsar 3122
Hitachi 2460, 2461, 2463 Samsung 2000, 2112, 2216 Freebox 3023 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
Sansui 2073 GC Electronics 3070 3018
En 205
Quasar 3122 CHEROKEE 4216 EURIEULT 4031
RadioShack 3123, 3127 Satellite Chess 4212, 4217 Eurodec 4052
RCA 3030, 3031, 3087, 3118 CityCom 4006, 4215, 4219 Europa 4053, 4218, 4219
Realistic 3070 AB Sat 4216, 4217 Clatronic 4013 Europhon 4219
Recoton 3126 AccessHD 4104 CNT 4010 Eurosat 4011
Regal 3078 ADB 4220 Comag 4080, 4081, 4082, 4083, 4086 Eurosky 4008, 4011, 4215, 4218, 4219,
Regency 3075 AGS 4216 Commlink 4005 4024
Rembrandt 3066 Akai 4053, 4055 Comtech 4050 Eurostar 4011, 4215, 4219
Runco 3122 Alba 4001, 4004, 4006, 4007, 4062, Condor 4008, 4024, 4219 Eutelsat 4217
Sagem 3101 4217 Connexions 4014, 4024 Exator 4001, 4004
Samsung 3069, 3089, 3114, 3120 Aldes 4005, 4007, 4010 Conrad 4024, 4215, 4218, 4219 Expressvu 4117
SAT 3098 Allsat 4048, 4053, 4055 Conrad Electronic 4217, 4219 Fenner 4024, 4212, 4217
Scientific Atlanta
3000, 3001, 3002, 3003, 3006, Allsonic 4005, 4008, 4024 Contec 4050 Ferguson 4006, 4052, 4214
3028, 3029, 3081, 3086, 3089, Alltech 4217 Coolsat 4096 Fidelity 4218
3094, 3095, 3108 Alpha 4053 Cosat 4048 Finlandia 4006
Signal 3072, 3123 Alpha Digital 4104 Coship 4109 Finlux 4006
Signature 3066 Alphastar 4077 Crown 4011 FinnSat 4050, 4052
Sony 3092, 3125 Amitronica 4217 Daeryung 4014 Flair Mate 4217
Sprucer 3118 Amstrad 4011, 4035, 4217, 4218 Daewoo 4057, 4217 Foxtel 4204, 4222, 4244, 4245, 4246,
Standard Component Anglo 4217 DDC 4007 4247
3115 Ankaro 4005, 4008, 4024, 4217 Delega 4007 Freecom 4001, 4049, 4218
Starcom 3017, 3072, 3119, 3123 Anttron 4001, 4004 Dew 4050 FTEmaximal 4024, 4217
Stargate 3072, 3123 Apollo 4001 Diamond 4051 Fuba 4001, 4008, 4014, 4015, 4024,
Starquest 3072, 3123 Armstrong 4011, 4053 Digiality 4219 4055, 4215
Supercable 3090 Artec 4100 Digital Stream 4105 Galaxis 4005, 4008, 4009, 4024, 4048,
Supermax 3127 Asat 4053, 4055 DIRECTV 4056, 4064, 4067, 4068, 4070, 4050, 4215, 4222, 4246
Tele+1 3107, 3111 ASLF 4217 4071, 4074, 4107, 4116, 4119, GE 4066, 4093, 4111, 4197
TELENET 3004 Astacom 4216 4121, 4122, 4123, 4127, 4192, General Instrument
Telepiu 3107 Astra 4009, 4011, 4054, 4217, 4219 4193, 4194, 4195, 4196, 4197, 4019, 4073
Thomson 3082, 3091 Astro 4004, 4008, 4010, 4015, 4024, 4198, 4199, 4200, 4201, 4202, GMI 4011
TIME WARNER 3084 4213, 4218, 4219 4203, 4206, 4207, 4221 GOI 4117
Tocom 3067 AudioTon 4004, 4048 Discoverer 4212 Goldbox 4213
Torx 3017 Aurora 4222, 4246 Discovery 4216 GoldStar 4049
Toshiba 3122 Austar 4222, 4246 Diseqc 4216 Goodmans 4002, 4006, 4029
Tristar 3127 Axiel 4216 Dish Network 4018, 4065, 4089, 4092, 4094, Goodmind 4111
Tudi 3102 Axis 4008, 4009, 4024, 4050 4095, 4117 Grandin 4031
Tusa 3072, 3123 BBK 4205 Dishpro 4018, 4117 Grothusen 4001, 4049
TV86 3077 Best 4008, 4024 Distrisat 4053 Grundig 4004, 4006, 4015, 4035, 4211,
Unika 3065, 3070 Blaupunkt 4015 Ditristrad 4048 4218, 4222, 4246
United Cable 3018, 3119 Blue Sky 4217 DNT 4014, 4053, 4055 Hänsel & Gretel 4219
Universal 3065, 3070 Boca 4011, 4054, 4059, 4217 Drake 4072 Hantor 4001, 4013
Universum 3097, 3099 Boston 4216 DStv 4222, 4246 Hanuri 4010
V2 3127 Brain Wave 4013 Dune 4024, 4240, 4242 Hauppauge 4044
Verizon Fios 3007 Broadcast 4012 Echostar 4014, 4018, 4065, 4089, 4117, Heliocom 4219
Videoway 3019 Broco 4217 4217 Helium 4219
View Star 3074, 3077, 3079 BSkyB 4035, 4041 Einhell 4001, 4005, 4011, 4217, 4218 Hinari 4007
Viewmaster 3127 BT 4216 Elap 4216, 4217 Hirschmann 4015, 4024, 4210, 4216, 4218,
Vision 3127 Bubu Sat 4217 Elekta 4010 4219
Visiopass 3097, 3100, 3101 Bush 4006, 4045 Elsat 4217 Hisawa 4013
Vortex View 3127 Cambridge 4218 Elta 4001, 4008, 4024, 4048, 4053, Hisense 4016
Wittenberg 3098 Canal Satellite 4213 4055 Hitachi 4006, 4114, 4199, 4203
Zenith 3113, 3122, 3124 Canal+ 4213 Emanon 4001 Homecast 4084, 4085, 4087
Zentek 3126 CaptiveWorks 4099 Emme Esse 4008, 4024 Houston 4048
Channel Master 4007, 4110 Engel 4217 HTS 4117
Chaparral 4075 Ep Sat 4006
En 206
Hughes 4064, 4068, 4192, 4194, 4196, Maspro 4006, 4217 Panasonic 4006, 4035, 4036, 4121, 4124, Satec 4217
4202 Matsui 4216 4126, 4198, 4221 Satelco 4024
Hughes Network Systems Max 4219 Panda 4006, 4219 Satford 4012
4071 Mediabox 4213 Pansat 4125 Satmaster 4012
Humax 4025, 4030, 4060, 4097 Mediamarkt 4011 Patriot 4216 Satplus 4212
Huth 4005, 4011, 4012, 4013, 4048, Mediasat 4009, 4213, 4218 Paysat 4127 Schneider 4008, 4212, 4216
4050, 4219, 4223 Medion 4008, 4024, 4217 PCT 4110 Schwaiger 4051, 4212, 4219
Hypson 4031 Medison 4217 Philco 4101 SCS 4215
Ilo 4016 Mega 4053, 4055 Philips 4006, 4033, 4053, 4055, 4061, Seemann 4009, 4011, 4014
Imex 4031 Memorex 4127 4068, 4071, 4127, 4196, 4201, SEG 4001, 4008, 4013, 4024
Innovation 4008 Metronic 4001, 4004, 4005, 4010, 4028, 4202, 4203, 4206, 4213, 4216 Seleco 4048
Insignia 4107 4031, 4217 Phoenix 4050 Servi Sat 4031, 4217
Intertronic 4011 Metz 4015 Phonotrend 4006, 4005, 4048 Siemens 4015
Intervision 4048, 4219 Micro electronic 4217, 4218, 4219 Pioneer 4046, 4213 Silva 4049
ITT Nokia 4006 Micro Technology 4217 Polsat 4052 Skantin 4217
Jerrold 4019 MicroGem 4106 Predki 4013 Skardin 4009
Johansson 4013 Micromaxx 4008, 4024 Premiere 4048, 4213 Skinsat 4218
JOK 4216 Microstar 4008 Priesner 4011 SKR 4217
JSR 4048 Microtec 4217 Primestar 4076 Sky Italia 4204
JVC 4029, 4065, 4089, 4117 Minerva 4015 Profile 4216 Skymaster 4005, 4017, 4022, 4212, 4217
Kamm 4217 Mitsubishi 4006, 4015, 4202 Promax 4006 Skymax 4053, 4055
Kathrein 4015, 4034, 4042, 4053, 4055, Mitsumi 4054 Prosat 4005, 4007 SkySat 4212, 4217, 4218, 4219
4063, 4215, 4216, 4217 Morgan's 4011, 4053, 4054, 4055, 4217 Proscan 4066, 4093, 4122, 4197 Skyvision 4048
Kathrein Eurostar 4215 Motorola 4019, 4088, 4090, 4091 Protek 4051 SM Electronic 4212, 4217
Klap 4216 Multichoice 4222, 4246 Proton 4016 Smart 4215, 4217
Konig 4219 Multitec 4212 Provision 4010 Sony 4067, 4070, 4213
Kosmos 4049 Muratto 4049 Quadral 4005, 4007, 4008, 4216, 4024 SR 4011, 4054
KR 4004 Mysat 4217 Quelle 4015, 4215, 4219 Star Choice 4019
Kreiselmeyer 4015 Navex 4013 Quiero 4052 Starland 4217
K-SAT 4217 Neuhaus 4009, 4048, 4217, 4218, 4219 RadioShack 4019 Starring 4013
Kyostar 4001 Neusat 4217 Radiola 4053, 4055 Start Trak 4001
L&S Electronic 4024 Next Level 4019 Radix 4014, 4037 Strong 4001, 4004, 4008, 4024, 4049,
Lasat 4008, 4010, 4024, 4054, 4212, NextWave 4223 Rainbow 4004 4222, 4246
4215, 4219 Nikko 4011, 4217 RCA 4066, 4093, 4112, 4113, 4116, STS 4115
Lasonic 4108 Nokia 4006, 4040 4118, 4119, 4197, 4122, 4207 STVI 4031
Lenco 4001, 4024, 4049, 4215, 4217, Nordmende 4001, 4006, 4007, 4010, 4052 Realistic 4078 Sumida 4011
4219 Nova 4222 Redpoint 4009 Sunny Sound 4024
Leng 4013 Novis 4013 Redstar 4008, 4024 Sunsat 4217
Lennox 4048 Oceanic 4051 RFT 4005, 4053, 4055 Sunstar 4011, 4024, 4054
Lenson 4218 Octagon 4001, 4004, 4050 Roadstar 4217 Supermax 4223
Lexus 4053 Okano 4011 Roch 4031 Tandberg 4052
LG 4049, 4103, 4107 Optex 4048 Rover 4024, 4217 Tandy 4004
Lifesat 4008, 4024, 4212, 4217 Optus 4204, 4213, 4222, 4223, 4246 Saba 4010, 4215, 4216, 4219 Tantec 4006
Lifetec 4008 Orbitech 4001, 4212, 4213, 4218 Sabre 4006 TCM 4008
Lorenzen 4219 OSat 4004 Sagem 4023, 4052 Techniland 4012
Lorraine 4049 Otto Versand 4015 Sakura 4050 TechniSat 4014, 4021, 4026, 4027, 4038,
Lupus 4008, 4024 Pace 4006, 4015, 4035, 4043, 4047, Samsung 4000, 4001, 4003, 4032, 4064, 4039, 4053, 4212, 4213, 4218
Luxor 4218 4204, 4216, 4243 4069, 4071, 4120, 4123, 4196, Technology 4222
Lyonnaise 4052 Pacific 4051 4200 Technosat 4223
Macab 4052 Packsat 4216 SAT 4007, 4218 Technowelt 4219
Magnavox 4127, 4101 Palcom 4007 Sat Cruiser 4223 Teco 4011, 4054
Manata 4031, 4216, 4217 Palladium 4011, 4218 Sat Partner 4001, 4004, 4010, 4013, 4049, Telanor 4007
Manhattan 4006, 4010, 4048, 4216 Palsat 4212, 4218 4218 Telasat 4215, 4219
Marantz 4055 Panasat 4222, 4246 Sat Team 4217 Telecom 4217
Mascom 4010 Satcom 4012, 4219 Telefunken 4001, 4017, 4216
En 207
Teleka 4004, 4011, 4014, 4218, 4219
Telemaster 4010 CD
TELENET 4241
Telesat 4219 Yamaha 5082, 5095, 5114
Telestar 4212, 4213, 4218
Televes 4006, 4218
Telewire 4048 CD Recorder
Tempo 4223
Tevion 4008, 4217 Yamaha 5083
Thomson 4006, 4020, 4052, 4058, 4208,
4213, 4215, 4216, 4217, 4219
Thorens 4051 MD
Thorn 4006
Yamaha 5080, 5081, 5086
Tivax 4104
Tivo 4196
Tokai 4053
Tonna 4006, 4012, 4048, 4217, 4218 Tape
Toshiba 4194, 4202, 4203 Yamaha 5084, 5087
Triad 4049
Triasat 4218
Triax 4015, 4215, 4217, 4218
Turnsat 4217 Tuner
Tvonics 4214 Yamaha 5066, 5085, 5088, 5090, 5092
Twinner 4031, 4217
UEC 4204, 4222, 4246
Uher 4212
UltimateTV 4070 LD
Uniden 4079, 4127 Yamaha 2080
Unisat 4011, 4050, 4053
Unitor 4013
Universum 4015, 4215, 4219
US Digital 4016 Amplifier
Variosat 4015 Yamaha 5098
Vega 4024
Ventana 4053, 4055
Viewsat 4098
Visiosat 4013, 4048, 4216, 4217
Apple TV
Voom 4019 Apple 2241
Vortec 4001
Welltech 4212
WeTeKom 4212, 4218
Wevasat 4006
Wewa 4006
Winersat 4013
Wisi 4006, 4014, 4015, 4218, 4219
Woorisat 4010
Worldsat 4216
Xrypton 4024
XSat 4217
Zehnder 4008, 4209, 4010, 4215, 4024
Zenith 4102, 4107, 4195
Zodiac 4004
En 208
Yamaha Global Site
https://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Manual Development Group

© 2017 Yamaha Corporation
Published 05/2017 AM-A0
YJ291A0/EN1

Manual RX-A3070 2070

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual RX-A3070 2070

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual RX-A3070 2070

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AV Receiver

• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.

6 Connecting the power cable ........................................................51

Front panel ................................................................................................................................................... 13 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)........................................................................60

Front display (indicators) ............................................................................................................................ 15 Checking the measurement results .............................................................................................................63

10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly .................................66

Registering a scene ...................................................................................................................................... 77 Listening to Internet radio .......................................................... 107

* (Except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)

Operating range of the remote control

Playing back TV audio in surround Home Audio Network with

Image of sound field processing

What is a sound field? CINEMA DSP

CINEMA DSP HD3

Capability for reproducing reflections

CINEMA DSP HD3

YPAO-R.S.C. YPAO 3D measurement

YPAO Volume OFF

Low Frequency High

High-resolution music enhancer High-quality video processing

signal (such as a CD)

88.2/96 kHz signal

For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration” (p.30).

11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.

External power amp

Living room (main zone)

Enjoying videos using a TV in another room (HDMI connection)

Living room (main zone)

AV CONTROLLER AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) MusicCast CONTROLLER

X X – Play back music files stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE CONTROL

PHONES VIDEO AUX

5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA L AUDIO R HDMI IN

ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE CONTROL

PHONES VIDEO AUX

5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA L AUDIO R HDMI IN

a ON SCREEN key i MULTI ZONE keys m PRESET keys

a HDMI h Information display s VIRTUAL

HDMI (HDCP2.2) NETWORK

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COMPONENT VIDEO TRIGGER

ZONE 2/ ZONE 3/ (REAR)

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

(RX-A3070 U.S.A. model)

f PROGRAM keys s MUTE key

1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.20)

2 Connecting a TV and playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.41)

3 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.48)

4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.50)

5 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)

6 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)

7 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.52)

8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.53)

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.54)

10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.66)

11 Connecting to the MusicCast network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.74)

Ideal speaker layout Functions of each speaker

Speaker type Function

Surround back (L/R)

■ Placing speakers in your room 7.2.2/5.2.4 system [S]

X highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.